of 354

Creo Parametric Mold Design

Published on October 2017 | Categories: Documents | Downloads: 12 | Comments: 0
278 views

Comments

Content

Mold Design using Creo Parametric

T3424-380-01

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

Authored and published using

Copyright © 2011 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Copyright for PTC software products is with Parametric Technology Corporation, its subsidiary companies (collectively “PTC”), and their respective licensors. This software is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. User and training guides and related documentation from PTC is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may CREO精诚网 appear in this document. 中国CREO技术领航者 For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent and Licensing Information see backside of this guide.

About PTC University Welcome to PTC University! With an unmatched depth and breadth of product development knowledge, PTC University helps you realize the most value from PTC products. Only PTC University offers: • An innovative learning methodology - PTC’s Precision Learning Methodology is a proven proprietary approach used by PTC to develop and deliver learning solutions. • Flexible Delivery Options – PTC University ensures you receive the same quality training programs regardless of the learning style. Our extensive experience, innovative learning techniques, and targeted learning modules facilitate the rapid retention of concepts, and higher user productivity. • Premier Content and Expertise – A thorough instructor certification process and direct access to the PTC product development and PTC consulting organizations means that only PTC courses can give you highly-qualified instructors, the most up-to-date product information and best practices derived from thousands of deployments. • Global Focus – PTC University delivers training where and when you need it by providing over 100 training centers located across 35 countries offering content in nine languages. • Delivering Value – A role-based learning design ensures the right people have the right tools to do their jobs productively while supporting the organization’s overall performance goals. The course you are about to take will expose you to a number of learning offerings that PTC University has available. These include: • Instructor-led Training (ILT) - The ideal blend of classroom lectures, personal demonstrations, hands-on workshops, assessments, and post-classroom tools. • Pro/FICIENCY - This Web-based, skills assessment and development-planning tool will help improve your skills and productivity. • eLearning Libraries - 24/7 access to Web-based training that will compliment your instructor-led course. • Precision LMS - A powerful learning management system that will manage your eLearning Library and Pro/FICIENCY assessments. PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These are corporate learning programs designed to your organization’s specific goals, current skills, desired competencies and training preferences. Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the most out of your PTC products.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers North America • Education Services Registration – Tel: (888) 782-3773 – Fax: (781) 370-5307 • Technical Support (Monday - Friday) – Tel: (800) 477-6435 – Fax: (781) 707-0328 • License Management and Contracts – Tel: 877-ASK-4-PTC (877-275-4782) – Fax: (781) 707-0331

Europe • Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting – Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)

Asia • Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contact information. In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web site contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions to training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technical support, and register for online service options such as knowledge base searches, reference libraries and documentation. You can also find general information about PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, Customer Support, and PTC Partners.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

Precision Learning Precision Learning In The Classroom PTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to develop effective, comprehensive class material that will improve the productivity of both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches using the proven instructional design principal of ‘Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do’: • Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the key concepts. • These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in the software application. • You then apply the concepts through structured exercises. After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided in order for you to assess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will also identify the class topics that require further review. At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessment via your PTC University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide training on how to do this after the class.

Precision Learning After the Class Each student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearning account. This account will be automatically created if you do not already have one. As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account: • A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates a Recommended Learning Report based on your results. • A Web-based training version of the course, based on the same instructional approach of lecture, demonstration and exercise. The Recommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this training that you may want to review. Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages. The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after the live class.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

Precision Learning Recommendations PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associated training are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps are available for numerous PTC products and versions in the training section of our Web site at http://www.ptc.com/services/edserv/learning/paths/index.htm.

Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language and that the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only. Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the map corresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructor recommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training that corresponds to your role and job functions.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

Training Agenda Day 1 Module 01 Module 02 Module 03 Module 04 Module 05 Module 06 Module 07

― Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process ― Design Model Preparation ― Design Model Analysis ― Mold Models ― Shrinkage ― Workpieces ― Mold Volume Creation

Day 2 Module 08 Module 09 Module 10 Module 11 Module 12

― Parting Line and Parting Surface Creation ― Splitting Mold Volumes ― Mold Component Extraction ― Mold Features Creation ― Filling and Opening the Mold

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

Table of Contents Mold Design using Creo Parametric Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Design Model Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Understanding Mold Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Preparing Design Models for the Mold Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Creating Profile Rib Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Creating Drafts Split at Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Creating Drafts Split at Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Creating Drafts Split at Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Design Model Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Analyzing Design Models Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Performing a Draft Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Understanding Mold Analysis Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Performing a Thickness Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Mold Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Creating New Mold Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Analyzing Model Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Locating the Reference Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Assembling the Reference Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Creating the Reference Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Redefining the Reference Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Analyzing Reference Model Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Analyzing Variable Mold Cavity Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Calculating Projected Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 Shrinkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Shrinkage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Shrinkage by Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Shrinkage by Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1 5-2 5-4 5-9

Workpieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Creating Style States Using the View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Creating a Workpiece Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Creating a Custom Automatic Workpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Creating and Assembling a Workpiece Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 CREO精诚网 Reclassifying and Removing Mold Model Components . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 中国CREO技术领航者 Mold Volume Creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Surfacing Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Understanding Mold Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Sketching Mold Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Sketching Slider Mold Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Creating a Reference Part Cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 Replacing Surfaces and Trimming to Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Sketching Insert Mold Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 Parting Line and Parting Surface Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Understanding Parting Lines and Parting Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Creating an Automatic Parting Line using Silhouette Curves . . . . . . 8-4 Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Slides. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Loop Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Creating a Skirt Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extend Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Tangent Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extension Directions . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: ShutOff Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Analyzing Surface Editing and Manipulation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41 Merging Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46 Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51 Creating a Parting Surface Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56 Splitting Mold Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Splitting the Workpiece. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Splitting Mold Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Splitting Volumes using Multiple Parting Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Blanking and Unblanking Mold Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Analyzing Split Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Mold Component Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Extracting Mold Components from Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Applying Start Models to Mold Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Mold Features Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Creating Waterline Circuits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Analyzing Waterline End Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Performing a Waterlines Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 Creating Sprues and Runners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 Creating Ejector Pin Clearance Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22 Creating UDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28 CREO精诚网 Placing UDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33 中国CREO技术领航者 Filling and Opening the Mold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Creating a Molding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Opening the Mold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Draft Checking a Mold Opening Step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Interference Checking a Mold Opening Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 Viewing Mold Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

Student Preface — Using the Header In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and the header used to begin each lab in Creo Parametric. Course Handbook Layout: • Modules – Topics ♦ Concept ♦ Theory ♦ Procedure ♦ Exercise (if applicable) Procedure / Exercise Header:

Course Handbook Layout The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate information after the course is complete. Each course is organized into modules, each covering a general subject. Each module contains topics, with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Each individual topic in the module is divided into the following sections:

CREO精诚网 • Concept — This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and 中国CREO技术领航者 is presented during the class lecture as an overhead slide, typically with figures and bullets.

• Theory — This section provides detailed information about content introduced in the Concept, and is discussed in the class lecture but not shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains additional paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures. • Procedure — This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to complete the topic within Creo Parametric. Procedures are short, focused, and cover a specific topic. Procedures are found in the Student Handbook only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge topics that contain only Concept and Theory. • Exercise — Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are typically longer, more involved, and use more complicated models. Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not every topic will have an associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guide and/or the online exercise HTML files. The first module for certain courses is known as a “process module.” Process modules introduce you to the generic high-level processes that will be taught over the span of the entire course.

Procedure / Exercise Header To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as “labs”) as concise as possible, each begins with a “header.” The header lists the name of the lab, the working directory, and the file you are to open. The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable: 1. Procedure/Exercise Name — This is the name of the lab. 2. Scenario — This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The Scenario is only found in Exercises. 3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed — A reminder that you should close any open files and erase them from memory: • Click Close

until the icon is no longer displayed.

and then click OK. • Click Erase Not Displayed Folder Name — This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are stored in topic folders within specific functional area folders. The path to the lab files is: • PTCU\CreoParametric1\functional_area_folder\topic_folder In the example, Rounds is the functional area folder and Variable is the topic folder, so you would set the Working Directory to PTCU\CreoParametric1\Round\Variable. • To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or browser, and select Set Working Directory. 5. Model to Open — This is the file to be opened from the working directory. In the above example, VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model to open. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and so on. If you are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead create a new model, you will see Create New. CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 • To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser and select Open. 4.

6. 7.

Task Name — Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one or more tasks within a lab. Lab Steps — These are the individual steps required to complete a task.

Two other items to note for labs: • Saving — Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless otherwise stated. • Exercises — Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.

Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs Before you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that you configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab exercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the training labs on a computer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps: • Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:. – The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric1\. • Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut. – Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop. – Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties. – Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as the default folder. For example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric1\. • Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut. – The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric1 folder. You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

PROCEDURE - Student Preface — Using the Header In this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the Creo Parametric working environment for each lab in the course. Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder Step 1:

EXTRUDE_1.PRT

Configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab exercises properly.

Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer outside of a training center, otherwise proceed to Task 2. 1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:. • The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically, such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric1. 2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut. • Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop. • Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties. • Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be PTCU\CreoParametric1. 3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut. • The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric1 folder. You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders. Step 2:

Add the Erase not Displayed icon to the Quick Access toolbar.

1. Click File > Manage Session, and cursor over Erase Not Displayed. • Right-click and select Add to Quick Access Toolbar. Step 3:

Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to avoid any possible conflicts.

1. If you currently have files open, click Close toolbar, until the icon no longer displays.

from the Quick Access

2. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Quick Access toolbar. • Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

Step 4:

Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedure and set the folder indicated in the header as the Creo Parametric working directory.

1. Notice the folder indicated in the header above. 2. If necessary, select the Folder Browser

tab from the navigator.

• Click Working Directory to view the current working directory folder in the browser. • Double-click SampleFunctionalArea. 3. Right-click the Topic1_Folder folder and select Set Working Directory. 4. Double-click the Topic1_Folder folder to display its contents in the browser.

Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the browser to navigate to the topic folder, and then right-click and select Set Working Directory from the browser. Step 5:

Open the file for this procedure.

1. Notice the lab model is specified in the header above. • Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it. 2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab: • Read the first task. • Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initial datum display for the procedure or exercise. Complete the optional task below to customize the In Graphics toolbar, making the selection of the datum display options easier • Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

Step 6:

OPTIONAL: Customize the In Graphics toolbar to show the datum display options.

1. Right-click the In Graphics toolbar and clear the Datum Display Filters check box. • Select the Plane Display, Axis Display, Point Display, and Csys Display check boxes. • Click in the graphics window. • Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. The In Graphics toolbar should appear as shown.

3. The model should now appear as shown.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

Module

1

Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process Module Overview In this module, you learn about the basic mold process that is typically used to take a part from its design stage to the creation of its mold. This simplified process is used at most companies, although your specific company process may differ. The process is supported in further detail throughout the course modules.

Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to: • Prepare and analyze a design model by running a draft check. • Create a new mold model and assemble the reference model and workpiece. • Create a slider mold volume for undercut geometry. • Create the mold parting surface by first creating a parting line. • Create the mold components by splitting the mold volumes and generating the cavity components. • Create mold features by creating a runner in the mold model. • Fill and open the mold by creating a molding and performing a mold opening analysis.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 1 | Page 1

Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process The basic mold process can be summarized in seven high-level steps: 1.

2.

3.

4. 5.

6.

7.

Preparing and Analyzing Design Models • Drafts, draft/thickness checks. Creating the Mold Model • Reference model, shrinkage, workpiece. Creating Mold Volumes • Sliders and other sketched volumes. Creating Parting Surfaces Creating Mold Components • Split Mold Volumes and create cavity insert parts. Creating Mold Features • Waterlines, runners, and ejector pin holes. Filling and Opening the Mold • Create a molding and open the mold.

Figure 1 – Analyzing a Design Model

Figure 2 – Creating the Mold Model and Parting Surface

Figure 3 – Filling and Opening the Mold

Preparing and Analyzing Design Models When you create a mold for a design model, you should first inspect the model and analyze it to verify that it is indeed ready to be molded. Typically, the reference model geometry that you use for a mold model is derived from the design model. You can analyze the design model and reference model for adequate draft features and consistent thickness, adding draft features if necessary. It is critical that the final reference model has sufficient draft so that it can be cleanly ejected from the mold.

Creating the Mold Model Start the mold design by creating a mold manufacturing model. Creo Parametric automatically creates the mold assembly when you create the CREO精诚网model. The mold manufacturing model is also referred to mold manufacturing as中国CREO技术领航者 the Mold Model. Next, you assemble the reference model, which can be either the design model that is to be molded or a new model derived from Module 1 | Page 2

© 2011 PTC

the design model. You can account for the contraction of the molding part during cooling in the molding process by applying a shrinkage factor to the reference model. You also create or assemble the workpiece that represents the full volume of all the mold components that are needed to complete the mold model.

Creating Mold Volumes You can create mold volumes manually using sketch-based features. A mold volume is a three-dimensional, enclosed surface quilt with no mass in the workpiece of a mold model. You can also create a special type of mold volume called a slider, automatically, by having Creo Parametric detect undercut areas in the mold model.

Creating Parting Surfaces You can create parting surfaces for the mold model using the skirt surface technique. The skirt surface technique requires parting lines that you create by using silhouette curves. You can use the parting surfaces to split the workpiece into separate mold volumes later in the mold design process. You can also create parting surfaces manually.

Creating Mold Components You can split the workpiece volume into one or more mold volumes based on the parting surfaces. The main mold volumes are classified into core and cavity. Once the desired mold volumes are created and split, you can create the mold components, including sliders, from the mold volumes. The mold components are fully functional parts that you can open and modify in the Part mode of Creo Parametric. You can also machine the components using Creo NC.

Creating Mold Features You can create regular and user-defined assembly features to facilitate the molding process. Regular features include mold-specific features such as waterlines, runners, and ejector-pin clearance holes. You can also create user-defined features from regular cuts and slots that are placed on mold models to create sprues.

Filling and Opening the Mold You can create the molding component that represents the filled mold cavity. Creo Parametric creates the molding component automatically by determining the volume remaining in the workpiece after extracting the mold components. You can then define the steps for the mold-opening process for every component in the mold model except the reference model and workpiece. During the mold opening analysis you can determine whether there is interference with any static components for each of the steps that you define.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 1 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process Objectives After successfully completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Prepare and analyze a design model for manufacturing. • Create a mold model. • Create mold volumes. • Create a parting surface. • Create mold components. • Create mold features. • Fill and open the resulting mold. You are a design engineer at a camera company. You have been given the front housing of a new camera design and are tasked with creating the manufacturing mold for it. You know from previously received models that you must first prepare and analyze the design model to verify it is able to be manufactured. Once you have verified that the design model can be manufactured using a mold, you can create the mold model and mold volumes. You can then create the mold parting surface and mold components. Finally, you can fill and open the resulting mold. Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Process\Mold Task 1:

CAMERA.PRT

Prepare and analyze a design model for manufacturing.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab. 3. Click Mold/Cast from the Engineering group to switch from the standard application to the Mold application. 4. Click Mold Analysis Analysis group.

from the

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 1 | Page 4

© 2011 PTC

5. To perform a draft check, do the following: • Select Draft Check from the Type drop-down list in the Mold Analysis dialog box. • Ensure that Part is selected from the Surface drop-down list. • Click Select Part and select the entire CAMERA.PRT. Middle-click to complete selecting the part. 6. Ensure that Plane is selected from the Pull Direction drop-down list. • Click Select Plane and select the TOP datum plane for the pull direction. • Select Both directions for angle options. • Type 0.5 as the value for the draft angle and press ENTER. 7. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden from the Model Display types drop-down menu. 8. Click Compute. The positive draft areas appear in magenta, and the negative draft areas in blue. The vertical walls appear in yellow. This demonstrates that the part is fully drafted and is ready to be used in creating a mold model. 9. Select Shading from the Model Display types drop-down menu. 10. Click Close from the Mold Analysis dialog box. 11. Click Close

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

.

Module 1 | Page 5

Task 2:

Create the camera mold model.

1. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. 2. In the New dialog box, do the following: • Select Manufacturing as the Type. • Select Mold Cavity as the Sub-type. • Type camera_mold as the Name. • Clear the Use default template check box and click OK. • Select the mmns_mfg_mold template. • Click OK. 3. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category. • Click Add. • Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field. • Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK > No.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 1 | Page 6

© 2011 PTC

4. Select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group to assemble the reference model. 5. In the Open dialog box, select CAMERA.PRT and click Open. 6. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Same Model as the Reference Model Type and click OK. 7. Specify the mold cavity layout by doing the following: • Click Reference Model Origin from the Layout dialog box, and select the MAIN coordinate system in the CAMERA.PRT sub-window. • Click Preview, and notice how the reference model is assembled and oriented. 8. In the Layout dialog box, select Rectangular as the Layout. • Select X-Symmetric as the Orientation. • Type 120 as the X Increment value, and 150 as the Y Increment value. • Click Preview. • Notice that a pattern of reference models, symmetric about the x-axis, are assembled to create a multi-cavity mold.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 1 | Page 7

9. In the Layout dialog box, select Y-Symmetric as the Orientation and click Preview. 10. Notice that a pattern of reference models, symmetric about the y-axis, are assembled to create a multi-cavity mold. 11. Select Single as the Layout to create a single-cavity mold and click OK. 12. In the Warning message window, click OK to accept the change in the absolute accuracy value. 13. Apply shrinkage to the reference model by doing the following: • Select Shrink by scale from the Shrinkage types drop-down menu in the Modifiers group. • In the model tree, click the node for CAMERA.PRT to expand it and select the PRT_CSYS_DEF coordinate system. • Type 0.005 as the Shrink Ratio in the Shrinkage By Scale dialog box and press ENTER. • Click Apply Changes .

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 1 | Page 8

© 2011 PTC

14. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab. 15. Select Automatic Workpiece from the Workpiece types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group to create an automatic workpiece. 16. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, do the following: • Select the MOLD_DEF_CSYS coordinate system from the graphics window as the Mold Origin. • Type 20 for the negative, and type 20 for the positive X direction values. • Type 30 for the negative, and type 30 for the positive Y direction values. • Type 20 for the negative, and type 20 for the positive Z direction values. • Click OK. 17. Disable Plane Display Csys Display

and

.

18. Select CAMERA_MOLD_WRK. PRT. 19. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 20. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 21. Select the Mold tab.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 1 | Page 9

Task 3:

Create slider mold volumes.

1. Select Mold Volume from the Mold Volume types drop-down menu in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group to create the slider volume. 2. To rename the mold volume feature, do the following: from the Controls group. • Click Properties • Type Slider as the Name of the mold volume in the Properties dialog box and press ENTER. 3. Click Slider

from the Volume Tools group.

4. In the Slider Volume dialog box, do the following: • Click Calculate Undercut Boundaries . • Press CTRL, and select Quilt 1 and Quilt 2 from the Exclude column. • Click Include Boundary to add the Surfaces selected quilts to the Include column for slider calculation. • Click Select Projection Plane and select the right surface of the workpiece. 5. Click Apply Changes from the Slider Volume dialog box. 6. Click OK group.

from the Controls

You can also manually sketch the shape of the slider volume to represent a standard shape that can be manufactured.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 1 | Page 10

© 2011 PTC

Task 4:

Create a parting surface.

1. Click Silhouette Curve from the Design Features group to automatically create parting line curves. 2. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, click Preview to see the silhouette curves automatically created at all edges of the mold model. 3. Some tweaks need to be made to the automatic parting line curves. 4. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, double-click Slides. • Select the slider volume from the graphics window. • Click Done/Return from the menu manager.

5. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, double-click Loop Selection. • Select the Chains tab. • Select chain 4–1 and click Lower to switch the curve from the upper edge to the lower edge of the hole. • Click OK from the Loop Selection dialog box.

6. Click OK from the Silhouette Curve dialog box to complete the parting line.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 1 | Page 11

7. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group. 8. Click Skirt Surface from the Surfacing group to create an automatic parting surface. 9. Select the workpiece. 10. Select the silhouette curve. 11. Click Done from the menu manager.

12. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension. 13. In the Extension Control dialog box, select the Extension Directions tab. • Click Add. • Press CTRL and select the two vertices. 14. Click OK from the Select dialog box. 15. Click Done from the menu manager. 16. Query-select the left surface of the workpiece as the normal plane. 17. Click Okay from the menu manager. 18. Click OK to close the Extension Control dialog box. 19. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box. 20. Click OK from the Controls group to complete the parting surface.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 1 | Page 12

© 2011 PTC

Task 5:

Create the mold components.

1. Select Volume Split from the Mold Volume types drop-down menu in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group to split the workpiece into mold volumes. 2. Click Two Volumes > All Wrkpcs > Done from the menu manager. 3. Select the slider and click OK from the Select dialog box. 4. Click OK from the Split dialog box. 5. In the Properties dialog box, type main_vol as the Name of the first volume and press ENTER. 6. In the Properties dialog box, type slider_vol as the Name of the second volume and press ENTER. 7. Click Volume Split to split the main volume into core and cavity inserts. 8. Click Two Volumes > Mold Volume > Done . 9. In the Search Tool dialog box, do the following: • Select Quilt: F11(MAIN_VOL) from the list of items found. to add the • Click Add Item selected quilt to the list of items selected. • Click Close. 10. Select the parting surface (you may have to use query select) and click OK from the Select dialog box. 11. Click OK from the Split dialog box. 12. In the Properties dialog box, type core as the Name of the first volume (the lower half) and press ENTER. 13. In the Properties dialog box, type cavity as the Name of the second volume (the upper half) and press ENTER. CREO精诚网

中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 1 | Page 13

14. Select Cavity insert from the Mold Component types drop-down menu in the Components group. 15. In the Create Mold Component dialog box, press CTRL and select CAVITY, CORE, and SLIDER. • Click OK. 16. Notice that the mold components appear as individual solid parts in the model tree. 17. In the model tree, right-click CORE.PRT and select Open. 18. Click Close

.

19. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 20. Click Mold Display

from the Visibility group.

21. Select the Mold tab. 22. In the Blank – Unblank dialog box, press CTRL and select CAMERA, CAMERA_MOLD_WRK, and CORE from the Visible Components list and click Blank. as the Filter. • Click Parting Surface • Select PART_SURF_1 and click Blank. as the Filter. • Click Volume • Select SLIDER_VOL and click Blank. • Click Close. 23. In the model tree, right-click SILH_CURVE_1 and select Hide.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 1 | Page 14

© 2011 PTC

Task 6:

Create a runner mold feature.

1. Click Runner from the Production Features group. 2. Select Half Round from the menu manager. 3. Type 3 as the runner diameter and press ENTER. 4. Query-select the bottom surface as the Sketching Plane and click Okay > Default from the menu manager. 5. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar.

from the

6. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT and the top and bottom edges as references, and click Close from the References dialog box. 7. Click Line Chain and sketch two lines of equal length. 8. Click One-by-One length to 29. 9. Click OK

and edit the

.

10. Press CTRL+D and select CAVITY.PRT as the intersected component. 11. Click OK from the Intersected Comps dialog box. 12. Click OK from the Runner dialog box. 13. In the model tree, right-click CORE.PRT and select Unblank.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 1 | Page 15

Task 7:

Fill and open the mold.

1. Click Create Molding from the Components group to create the molding. 2. Type camera_molding as the Part name and press ENTER. 3. Press ENTER to accept the default Mold Part Common Name.

4. Click Mold Opening from the Analysis group to perform a mold opening analysis. 5. Click Define Step > Define Move from the menu manager. 6. Select SLIDER.PRT. 7. Click OK in the Select dialog box.

8. Select the edge to define the direction of the move. 9. Type -100 as the translation value and press ENTER. 10. Click Done from the menu manager.

11. Click Define Step > Define Move from the menu manager. 12. Select CAVITY.PRT. 13. Click OK in the Select dialog box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 1 | Page 16

© 2011 PTC

14. Select the edge to define the direction of the move. 15. Type 100 as the translation value and press ENTER. 16. Click Done from the menu manager.

17. Click Define Step > Define Move from the menu manager. 18. Select CORE.PRT. 19. Click OK in the Select dialog box.

20. Select the edge to define the direction of the move. 21. Type -100 as the translation value and press ENTER.

22. Click Done from the menu manager. 23. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 1 | Page 17

24. Click in the background to de-select all items. 25. Click Regenerate 26. Click Save the model.

from the Quick Access toolbar.

from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK to save

27. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All and OK to erase the model from memory. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 1 | Page 18

© 2011 PTC

Module

2

Design Model Preparation Module Overview It is not uncommon for designers to hand off design models without drafts or ribs because they do not know enough about mold design in order to make decisions about parting surfaces and pull direction, and they may not be comfortable with specifying draft angles or creating ribs. The reference model geometry for a mold model is derived from the corresponding design model geometry. Consequently, the mold designer may have to prepare the design model so that a mold can be created from it. In this module, you learn the basics of mold design and how to prepare a design model for the mold process.

Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to: • Understand the theory behind creating molds. • Prepare a design model for the mold process. • Create profile rib features. • Split drafts using various techniques.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 2 | Page 1

Understanding Mold Theory The mold designer creates the mold and its components using Creo Parametric's Mold mode. • A mold consists of a core and cavity. • Sprues and runners channel material into the void. • Ejector pins eject the solidified part.

Figure 1 – Moldbase Layout Created in EMX

Figure 2 – Mold Core and Cavity

Figure 3 – Sprue and Runner Design

Understanding Manufacturing Mold Theory From a manufacturing point of view, in its simplest form, a mold consists of a core and cavity which are split at a parting line. The core is the convex feature side of the mold that enters an opposing cavity when the mold is closed. The cavity is the concave feature side of the mold into which an opposing core enters when the mold is closed. An example of a mold core and cavity is shown in Figure 2. The void between the closed core and cavity is filled with a material such as plastic. This material-filled void becomes the resulting part when it solidifies. For theCREO精诚网 material to find its way into the void, there must be various chambers and paths created in the mold. These chambers are defined as follows: 中国CREO技术领航者

Module 2 | Page 2

© 2011 PTC

• Sprues — The route the plastic material takes from the point where it enters the mold until it reaches the runners. When solidified, it remains attached to the part via one or more runners and is typically removed in finishing. • Runners and gates — Channels machined into the mold that directs the plastic material from sprue into the mold cavity. In Figure 3 you can see the sprue, runners, and gates attached to the four molded pucks. Once the material solidifies, the part can be removed from the mold. To aid in ejecting the part, mold components called ejector pins are often designed into the mold. The sizes and arrangement of the pins are selected to minimize the impact on the part design.

Understanding CAD Mold Theory Let us now consider Understanding CAD Mold Theory. From a CAD point of view, a designer typically hands off a completed or nearly completed Creo Parametric design model to a mold designer. The mold designer then takes the design model and uses it to create a Reference model within Creo Parametric's Mold mode. The mold designer uses the Reference model to create the resulting mold core and cavity components which create the void of the Reference model. The mold core and cavity components split at a location called the parting surface, which the mold designer must determine. Once the mold designer creates the mold components in Creo Parametric's Mold mode, he or she can use the Expert Moldbase Extension to create the entire moldbase layout. The Expert Moldbase Extension, or EMX, uses a 2-D process-driven GUI to guide the mold designer toward the optimal design. It uses a catalog of standard components (DME, HASCO, FUTABA, PROGRESSIVE, STARK, and so on), or customized components. Figure 1 shows a completed moldbase that was developed with the Expert Moldbase Extension. Mold Design using Creo Parametric focuses only on the creation of the mold components and does not cover the Expert Moldbase Extension.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 2 | Page 3

Preparing Design Models for the Mold Process You may not be able to create a mold from a perfectly valid design model. • Design model requirements for molding typically include: – Draft on “vertical” surfaces. – Uniform thickness. – Ribs. – Ejector pin “pads.” • Preparation guidelines: – Draft applied to “vertical” faces. – Ribs should be about half the model thickness and drafted where needed. – Create ejector pin “pads” where needed. – Reorder or insert draft features before rounds if possible.

Figure 1 – Original Design Model

Figure 2 – Design Model Prepared for Molding

Preparing Design Models for the Mold Process Even though the design model you receive may be a valid design model, you may not be able to use the model to create a robust mold. The following items are typically required of the design model to create a robust mold and part: • Draft — Facilitates the removal of the part from the mold. • Uniform thickness — Areas of a part that are thicker than others can result in sink zones or warping when cooling occurs. • Ribs — Add strength and rigidity to the molded part. • Ejector pin “pads” — Sufficient material is needed for the full diameter of an ejector pin at the location where it pushes against the resulting part to eject it from the mold. These CREO精诚网 items may not be present in the design model when you receive it because the design engineer does not know where the parting surface or 中国CREO技术领航者 ejector pins will be located in the mold. Therefore, you must prepare the Module 2 | Page 4

© 2011 PTC

design model for the mold process by adding the necessary features needed to make a mold from the model.

Guidelines for Proper Design Model Preparation The following guidelines indicate how to properly prepare a design model for molding. • Try to create models that are of uniform thickness to prevent sink zones or warping in the resulting molded part. • Create ribs that are approximately half the model's wall thickness to prevent sink. Apply draft to the rib walls if they are “vertical” faces. Vertical faces are those that are vertical with respect to how the mold opens. In Figure 2, two ribs have been created and draft has been applied. • Be aware of the need to accommodate ejector pins in your design model for proper ejection from the mold. Create ejector pin “pads” at these locations in the model where the ejector pins push against the model to eject it. In Figure 2, four ejector pin pads have been created. • Apply draft in the proper direction at least 0.5 degrees on all “vertical” faces. Draft has been applied to all faces that are vertical with respect to how the mold opens. • When creating Draft features in Creo Parametric, either reorder them to be created before any related rounds or insert them before the rounds. This practice results in a more robust Creo Parametric model. In Figure 2, the draft has been inserted before the adjacent rounds.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 2 | Page 5

Creating Profile Rib Features A profile rib feature is similar to an extruded protrusion, except that it requires an open section sketch. • Profile rib features require an open sketch. • You can edit the side that thickens. • You can flip to which side of the sketch you want to create the rib. • Rib geometry adapts to the adjacent, solid geometry.

Figure 1 – Viewing Open Sketches

Figure 2 – Editing the Side that Thickens

Figure 3 – Flipping Which Side the Rib is Created

Creating Profile Rib Features Ribs are typically used to strengthen parts. A profile rib feature is similar to an extruded protrusion, except that it requires an open section sketch. The rib also conforms to existing planar or cylindrical geometry when it is extruded. After you select an open section sketch and set a thickness, Creo Parametric automatically creates the profile rib feature by merging it with your model. The system can add material above or below the sketch, and the thickness can be applied on either side, or be symmetric about the sketch. The Profile Rib enables you to create rib features in less time than it would take for you to CREO精诚网 create and sketch a protrusion.

中国CREO技术领航者

Module 2 | Page 6

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Profile Rib Features Close Window Rib\Profile Task 1:

Erase Not Displayed RIB.PRT

Create profile rib features on a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. from the 2. Select Profile Rib Rib types drop-down menu in the Engineering group. 3. Select RIB_SKETCH-1. 4. Drag the handle and edit the width to 75. 5. Click Complete Feature

.

Notice the angled rib surface is not planar; it is contoured to match the curved surface which is adjacent to the sketch.

6. Click Profile Rib

.

7. Select RIB_SKETCH-2. 8. Orient to view orientation RIGHT. 9. Drag the handle and edit the width to 25. The rib is centered about the sketch. 10. Click Change Thickness . The rib moves to the Option left of the sketch.

11. Click Change Thickness again. The rib moves Option to the right of the sketch. 12. Click Complete Feature

.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 2 | Page 7

13. Reorient the model. 14. Click Profile Rib

.

15. Select RIB_SKETCH-3. The rib is above the sketch.

16. Click the yellow arrow in the graphics window. The rib is now on the bottom of the sketch. 17. Click Complete Feature

.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 2 | Page 8

© 2011 PTC

Creating Drafts Split at Sketch You can use a sketch to define custom split lines. • • • •

Sketch becomes linked. Sketch can be unlinked. A new sketch can be defined. Sketch need not lie on draft surface.

Figure 1 – Viewing Sketch

Figure 2 – Draft Split at Sketch

Creating Drafts Split at Sketch You can specify a sketch to be used as the split object. This enables you to create custom split lines. When you select an existing sketch as the split object, it becomes linked. However, you can unlink the sketch if desired. You can also define a new sketch. If the sketch does not lie on the draft surface, Creo Parametric projects it onto the draft surface in the direction normal to the sketching plane. The sketch in Figure 1 was used as the Split object for the draft in Figure 2.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 2 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Sketch Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Draft\Split-Sketch Task 1:

DRAFT_SPLIT-SKETCH.PRT

Create a draft split at a sketch.

1. Select Draft from the Draft types drop-down menu. • Select the large, front surface containing the sketch. 2. Right-click and select Draft Hinges. • Select the top surface of the left rectangular “step.” 3. Drag the angle so the upper draft portion goes into the model. 4. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. • Select Split by split object as the Split option. • Select sketch SPLIT_ SKETCH. • Select Draft second side only as the Side option. 5. Drag the angle so the draft goes into the model. .

6. Click Preview Feature 7. Click Resume Feature

.

8. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. • Select Draft first side only as the Side option. 9. Click Preview Feature

.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 2 | Page 10

© 2011 PTC

10. Click Resume Feature

.

11. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. • Select Draft sides independently as the Side option. • Edit both draft angles to 7 so the draft goes into the model. 12. Click Complete Feature

.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 2 | Page 11

Creating Drafts Split at Curve You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” curve. • Material at the curve remains constant.

Figure 1 – The Datum Curve

Figure 2 – Draft Split at Datum Curve

Creating Drafts Split at Curve You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” curve. This causes the material at the curve to remain constant. The curve shown in Figure 1 was used as the draft hinge. The draft was then split at this draft hinge to create the resulting geometry in Figure 2. If you specify a curve as the draft hinge, you must also specify a separate pull direction reference.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 2 | Page 12

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Curve Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Draft\Split-Curve Task 1:

DRAFT_SPLIT-CURVE.PRT

Create a draft split at a curve.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Draft from the Draft types drop-down list. • Select the front surface. 3. Right-click and select Draft Hinges. • Select the curve. 4. Right-click and select Pull Direction. • Select datum plane TOP from the model tree.

5. Edit the draft angle to 10. 6. In the dashboard, click Reverse Angle . 7. Click Preview Feature

.

8. Click Resume Feature

.

9. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. • Select Split by draft hinge as the Split option. • Select Draft sides dependently as the Side option. 10. Click Reverse Angle

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

.

Module 2 | Page 13

11. Click Complete Feature

.

12. Notice that this draft has removed material from the top and bottom of the model.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 2 | Page 14

© 2011 PTC

Creating Drafts Split at Surface You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” surface, causing material at the surface to be added. • Additional draft hinges can be created. – You must first split the draft surfaces. – Material remains the same size at both draft hinge locations. Figure 1 – Draft Split at Surface

Figure 2 – Splitting the Draft at Surface

Figure 3 – Selecting Multiple Draft Hinges

Creating Drafts Split at Surface You can create a draft that splits at a “waistline” surface, causing material at the surface to be added, as shown in Figure 1. This type of draft enables you to select additional draft hinges. To select a second hinge, you must first split the draft surfaces. The model remains the same size at both draft hinge locations. In Figure 2, the selected surface is used as the split object. Once this split object was defined, a second draft hinge was able to be added, as shown in Figure 3.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 2 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Surface Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Draft\Split-Surface Task 1:

DRAFT_SPLIT-SURFACE.PRT

Create a draft split at a surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Draft from the Draft types drop-down list. • Select the front surface.

3. Right-click and select Draft Hinges. • Select an edge on the front of the top surface. • Press SHIFT, cursor over an adjacent edge, right-click to query, and select the upper Tangent chain. 4. Right-click and select Pull Direction. • Select datum plane TOP from the model tree. 5. Edit the draft angle to 10.

6. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. • Select Split by split object as the Split option. • Select the surface quilt. 7. Edit the lower draft angle to 10. 8. Click Reverse Angle lower draft angle.

for the

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 2 | Page 16

© 2011 PTC

9. In the dashboard, select the References tab. 10. Right-click and select Draft Hinges. • Press CTRL and select an edge on the front of the bottom surface. • Press SHIFT, cursor over an adjacent edge, right-click to query, and select the bottom Tangent Chain. • The Draft hinges collector should contain two Tangent Chains. 11. Click Complete Feature

.

12. In the model tree, right-click QUILT and select Hide. 13. Note that this draft has added material to the center of the model. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 2 | Page 17

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 2 | Page 18

© 2011 PTC

Module

3

Design Model Analysis Module Overview Creo Parametric enables you to analyze the design model for key elements such as proper draft and thickness before creating the mold model. These tools help you ensure that the design model is acceptable to begin mold creation. In this module, you perform draft and thickness checks on design models.

Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to: • Understand the theory behind analyzing design models. • Analyze mold analysis settings. • Perform a draft check on a design model. • Perform a thickness check on a design model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 3 | Page 1

Analyzing Design Models Theory Analysis tools enable you to ensure that the design model is acceptable for mold creation. • Analysis tools include: – Draft check – Thickness check • Analysis tools can be used on components other than the design model. • Analysis tools can be used at times other than before the mold is created.

Figure 1 – Draft Check

Figure 2 – Thickness Check

Analyzing Design Models Theory You can perform analyses on design models before creating the mold model. Analysis tools enable you to ensure that the design model is acceptable for mold creation. You can perform the following types of analyses on design models: • Draft check • Thickness check You usually use these analysis tools before the mold is created, but you can also use them at almost any point during the mold process, including: • Parting line creation — If the parting line location is modified slightly you can perform a draft check to verify that the model is still properly drafted. • Parting surface creation — Again, if the parting surface is modified you can perform a draft check to verify that the model is still properly drafted. • Mold component creation — You can perform a thickness check on CREO精诚网 components other than the design model. You can perform a thickness check on the core or cavity component to verify that it has sufficient 中国CREO技术领航者 thickness to handle the stress during the molding part creation. Module 3 | Page 2

© 2011 PTC

Performing a Draft Check You can perform a draft check or draft analysis to ultimately determine whether a model is suitable for a mold operation. • Draft Check – Specify references: ♦ Surface ♦ Pull Direction – Specify options: ♦ One/Both directions ♦ Draft angle • Draft Analysis – Similar to Draft Check – You need not be in Mold mode to perform the analysis.

Figure 1 – One-sided Draft Check

Figure 2 – Two-sided Draft Check

Figure 3 – Running a Draft Analysis

Performing a Draft Check You can perform draft checking on a design model by first switching to the Mold application, and then selecting Mold Analysis from the Analysis group. You can use draft checking to determine whether the design model has the correct surfaces drafted and suitable draft angles in order to facilitate the mold opening process as well as the removal of the molding component. You must specify the following references to perform a draft check: • Surface — Specifies the surfaces for which the draft analysis is to be run. You can filter by Part, Surface, Quilt, or All Surfaces using the drop-down list and specify the proper reference. • Pull Direction — Specifies the pull direction to be used for the draft analysis. Usually, the pull direction is the direction in which the mold opens. You can filter the pull direction reference by Plane, Coordinate System, or Curve, Edge, or Axis and specify the proper reference. You can also flip the pull direction to the opposite side of the reference. You must also specify the following options: • One direction/Both directions — Enables you to specify whether the draft CREO精诚网 analysis is run on one or both sides of the direction reference. 中国CREO技术领航者 • Draft angle — Enables you to specify the desired draft angle to check for. © 2011 PTC

Module 3 | Page 3

Creo Parametric checks the angle between the planes that are normal to the surfaces of the design model and the pull direction. For a specified draft angle, if the draft check is based on one side, then surfaces with a higher draft angle appear in magenta in the pull direction. Surfaces between zero degrees of draft up to the specified draft angle appear in yellow, and surfaces with negative draft appear in blue. For a specified draft angle, if the draft check is based on both sides, then surfaces with a higher draft angle still appear in magenta in the pull direction. However, surfaces with positive and negative draft up to the specified draft angle appear in yellow, and surfaces with negative draft greater than the negative of the specified draft angle appear in blue.

Using the Draft Analysis Option You can also use the Draft analysis option to determine whether a model is suitable for a mold or casting operation. Like the draft check, you must select surfaces, specify a direction reference, specify one or both sides, and a draft angle. The system then produces a color plot of the draft angles. Based on the highlighting, you can identify areas that do not have sufficient draft angles. The following options are available for adjusting the plot: • Sample — Enables you to specify how the plot resolution is calculated. Options include Quality, Number, and Step. • Quality — Adjusts the quality of the plot. When you perform a Draft analysis, you can obtain the following results information: • Color plot of draft angles on the model. There are three different styles of color plot: – Rainbow — Displays a plot with numerous colors. – Gradient — Provides a three color display in the graphics window. Sufficient positive draft angles appear in red, sufficient negative draft angles appear in blue, and insufficient angles appear in white. – Two-color — Provides a two-color display in the graphics window. For Rainbow and Gradient plots, you can specify whether the color scale is Continuous, or specify the desired quantity of colors that appear.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 3 | Page 4

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Performing a Draft Check Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Draft_Check Task 1:

DRAFT-CHECK.PRT

Perform a draft check on a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab. 3. Click Mold/Cast

from the Engineering group.

4. Click Mold Analysis

from the Analysis group.

5. In the Mold Analysis dialog box, select Draft Check as the Type. • Click Select Part and select the part model. • Click OK from the Select dialog box. • Click Select Plane and select datum plane TOP from the model tree. 6. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden from the Model Display types drop-down menu. 7. Select One direction as the Angle Option, if necessary. 8. Edit the Draft angle to 2 and click Compute. 9. Rotate the model so that you can see the pegs underneath. 10. Notice that there is positive draft on the pegs and it needs to be negative. 11. Click Flip Direction and click Compute. 12. Notice that the colors have reversed. 13. Click Close from the Mold Analysis dialog box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 3 | Page 5

14. Right-click Draft 3 and select Edit. 15. Edit the draft angle to -3 and click twice in the background to finish editing the model. from the 16. Select Shading Model Display types drop-down menu. from the 17. Select No Hidden Model Display types drop-down menu. 18. Click Mold Analysis Analysis group.

from the

19. Repeat the same draft check analysis and notice that the pegs are now drafted the correct way for molding. 20. In the Mold Analysis dialog box, edit the Angle Option to Both directions and click Compute. • Notice that there is no change in the plot. • Edit the Draft angle to 4 and click Compute. • Notice that the pegs are now yellow. • Click Close. Task 2:

Run a draft analysis on the part model.

1. Click Draft group.

from the Analysis

2. Select DRAFT-CHECK.PRT from the model tree. 3. Right-click and select Direction Collector. 4. Select datum plane TOP from the model tree. 5. Edit the draft angle to 3 if necessary.

CREO精诚网 6. Notice that the plot looks similar 中国CREO技术领航者 to the draft check. Module 3 | Page 6

© 2011 PTC

7. In the Draft dialog box, edit the draft angle to 7 and press ENTER. 8. Notice the colors on the part model and compare them to those displayed in the Color Scale dialog box. 9. Notice that the angled surfaces on the top of the model actually are two different draft angles. 10. Click Complete Analysis

.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 3 | Page 7

Understanding Mold Analysis Settings You can modify the settings of a mold analysis to achieve different results. • Computation Settings – Modify sample type. – Modify plot resolution. • Display Settings – Modify plot scale. – Modify number of colors. • Saving Analyses – Quickly rerun a mold analysis at different times. – Blank/Unblank selected analyses.

Figure 1 – Modifying Display Settings

Figure 2 – Viewing Saved Analyses

Understanding Mold Analysis Settings When performing a mold analysis, you can modify settings to achieve different results. You can modify both computation and display settings. You can also save an analysis so that it can be easily rerun at a later time.

Modifying Computation Settings When performing a mold analysis, the following computation settings are available: • Sample — Enables you to specify how the plot resolution is calculated. Options include Quality, Number, and Step. – Quality

— Sets the plot sample type to Quality.

– Number of Points Points.

— Sets the plot sample type to Number of

— Sets the plot sample type to Step. – Step CREO精诚网 • 中国CREO技术领航者 Resolution — Adjusts the quality of the plot. For a Quality plot, you can adjust the resolution from Low to High using a slider. For a Number of Module 3 | Page 8

© 2011 PTC

Points plot, you can adjust the resolution by specifying the number of points, and for a Step plot you can adjust the resolution either by specifying a value or by using the slider from Min to Max. You can also specify whether to add further accuracy to the mold analysis computation by selecting the Result refinement check box. This check box causes additional computation to get more accurate results.

Modifying Display Settings When performing a mold analysis, the following display settings are available: • Scale type — Enables you to adjust the scale of the color scale. Options include the following: – Linear Scale

— Adjusts the color scale to a linear scale.

– Logarithmic Scale

— Adjusts the color scale to a logarithmic scale.

— Adjusts the color scale to two colors. The – Two Color Shading colors automatically specified are blue and magenta. • Number of colors — Enables you to specify the number of colors that appear in the color scale for the draft check. You can also specify the following options: • Fringe (strip) coloring — Performs fringe coloring on the model. Fringe coloring is not available with two color shading color scales. • Dynamic update — Dynamically updates changes without the user having to click Compute. You can only modify the display settings when performing a Draft Check mold analysis. This option is not available when performing a Waterlines mold analysis.

Saving Analyses You can also save mold analyses within the model you are performing the analysis on. Saving an analysis is beneficial because it enables you to quickly repeat the same analysis at different times without having to specify each of the references and options. When saving an analysis, you must provide a name that contains no spaces. You can save multiple analyses within the same model. All saved mold analyses appear in the Saved Analyses area of the Mold Analysis dialog box, as shown in Figure 2. You can either display or not display analyses by selecting the View tab and clicking Mold Display in the Visibility group. You can also access the Blank-Unblank dialog box by pressing CTRL+B. In Figure 2, the DRAFT_CHECK_8-DEGREES analysis appears, while the DRAFT_CHECK_4-DEGREES is blanked, or not displayed. You can delete a saved analysis at any point by clicking Delete.

CREO精诚网 You can display multiple saved analyses at the same time in the 中国CREO技术领航者 graphics window. © 2011 PTC

Module 3 | Page 9

Performing a Thickness Check You can perform a thickness check on a part model to check for maximum or minimum thickness at specified locations. • Two methods: – Select one or more planes. – Select references to create incremental slices. • Two checks available: – Maximum thickness – Minimum thickness • Interface is slightly different in part model versus manufacturing model.

Figure 1 – Displaying Thickness Cross-Sections Through Selected Planes

Figure 2 – Displaying Thickness Cross-Sections Through Slices

Performing a Thickness Check in a Model You can perform a thickness check on a model by selecting the Analysis tab in the ribbon, then clicking the Measure group drop-down menu and selecting Thickness following methods:

. You can measure thickness using either of the

• Select one or more planes through which the thickness is measured. You can press CTRL to select multiple planar references. • Select references to create incremental cross-section slices through which thickness is measured. In order to create these incremental slices, you must specify the following references: – From Slices — Specifies the start point of slicing. You can select either vertices or datum points for this reference. CREO精诚网 – To Slices — Specifies the end point of slicing. Again, you can select 中国CREO技术领航者 either vertices or datum points for this reference. Module 3 | Page 10

© 2011 PTC

– Direction — Specifies the direction of slicing. If necessary, you can click the direction arrow in the graphics window to flip the direction of slicing to point between the From Slices and To Slices references. Once you have specified the correct slicing references, you can specify the following options: – Use number of slices — Specifies the number of slices to be created between the selected references. – Offset — The incremental offset value that separates each cross-sectional slice. The Slices reference collectors become grayed out if you select a Plane reference to perform the thickness check. You can have the system perform the following two thickness checks at each specified reference: • Max — Checks for maximum thickness. The system performs a maximum thickness check based on the value you must specify. • Min — Checks for minimum thickness. The system performs a minimum thickness check based on the value you must specify. The Thickness dialog box displays the results for each thickness cross-section location. When you select a result in the dialog box, the thickness cross-section appears in the graphics window. The thickness dialog box also indicates whether the thickness at each cross-section surpassed the minimum or maximum thicknesses specified.

Performing a Thickness Check in a Manufacturing Model You can also perform a thickness check from within Mold mode by clicking from the Analysis group. Because the thickness check Thickness Check occurs within the context of an assembly, you must specify the part that the thickness check is to be performed on. Once the part is specified, the thickness check is similar to that of the model analysis thickness check, although the interface is slightly different. You can either select one or more planes through which to measure the thickness, or you can have the system create slices based on selected references. The system can check for both maximum and minimum thickness based on the specified thickness value you provide, and the results appear in the Model Analysis dialog box similar to those of the Thickness dialog box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 3 | Page 11

PROCEDURE - Performing a Thickness Check Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Thickness_Check Task 1:

THICKNESS-CHECK.PRT

Perform a thickness check on a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab. 3. Click the Measure group drop-down menu and select Thickness

.

4. Press CTRL and select datum planes FRONT, TOP, and RIGHT. 5. In the Thickness dialog box, edit the Max value to 0.2 and click Preview Analysis . • Notice that the #1 and #2 results have an area of thickness greater than 0.2. • Select the #2 result, and notice that it highlights in the graphics window. 6. In the Thickness dialog box, click Show All. • Notice that all three results highlight in the graphics window. • Click Clear.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 3 | Page 12

© 2011 PTC

7. In the Thickness dialog box, right-click in the Planes collector and select Remove All. • Click in the From Slices collector and select datum point PNT0. • Select datum point PNT1 as the To Slices reference. • Select datum plane RIGHT for the Direction collector. • Edit the Offset to 2. • Clear the Max check box. • Select the Min check box and edit the value to 0.15. . • Click Preview Analysis 8. Click Show All. 9. Click Accept from the Thickness dialog box.

Task 2:

Perform a thickness check in a mold cavity.

1. Click Open

and double-click MFG_THICKNESS.ASM.

2. Click Thickness Check

from the Analysis group.

3. Select the model from the graphics window.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 3 | Page 13

4. In the Model Analysis dialog box, click Slices for the Setup Thickness Check. • Select datum point PNT2 as the Start Point. • Select datum point PNT3 as the End Point. • Select datum plane MAIN_PARTING_PLN as the Slice Direction. • Click Okay from the menu manager to accept the upward direction. • Select the Use number of slices check box and edit the value to 6 slices. • Edit the Slice Offset to 1. • Clear the Max check box and select the Min check box, editing its value to 0.3. • Click Compute. • Click Close. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 3 | Page 14

© 2011 PTC

Module

4

Mold Models Module Overview You start the mold design process by creating a mold model. You assemble and orient the reference model that represents the design model being molded. You can also pattern or assemble the reference part multiple times to create multi-cavity molds. In this module, you learn how to create mold models and assemble the reference model into it.

Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to: • Create new mold models. • Analyze mold model accuracy. • Locate, assemble, and create the reference model. • Redefine the reference model. • Analyze the reference model orientation. • Analyze mold cavity layout and orientation. • Calculate the projected area of the reference model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 1

Creating New Mold Models Your company can create customized templates for creating new mold models. • A mold model consists of: – A reference model – Workpieces – Mold components – Molding • File extension is .asm • Use customized mold manufacturing templates. • Mold templates include: – Datums – Pull Direction – Layers – Units – Parameters – View Orientations • You can modify pull direction.

Figure 1 – New Mold Model Tree

Figure 2 – New Mold Model

Creating New Mold Models A mold model is the model you work on while in Mold Cavity Design mode, or Mold mode. The mold model, which has a file extension of .asm, contains the following: • • • •

A reference model. One or more workpieces that represent the overall size of cavity inserts. Several mold components that represent cavity inserts. One molding component that represents the product of the molding process. The remainder of this course focuses on the creation of these items.

You can create new mold models within Creo Parametric either by using File > New, or by clicking New . You can type the name of the mold and decide CREO精诚网 whether to use a default template or a template at all. Unless you select the Empty template, the new mold displays in the graphics window with some 中国CREO技术领航者 sort of default datum features. Module 4 | Page 2

© 2011 PTC

Using Templates You should create new mold models using a template. Mold templates are similar to part and assembly templates in that they enable you to create a new mold with predefined general information. Your company has probably created customized templates, as they contain your company's standards. Using a template to create a new mold is beneficial because it means that regardless of who created it, the mold contains the same consistent set of information, including: • Datums — Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and a default coordinate system, all named appropriately. • Default Pull Direction — The direction in which the mold opens. • Layers — When every mold, part, and assembly contains the same layers, it is easier to manage both the layers and items on the layer. • Units — Most companies have a company standard for units in their molds. Creating every mold with the same set of units ensures that no mistakes are made. • Parameters — Every mold can have the same standard metadata information. • View Orientations — Having every mold contain the same standard view orientations aids the molding process.

Modifying the Default Pull Direction The default pull direction is visible on the model at all times as a double set of arrows, as shown in Figure 2. It is used as a default direction for all mold-specific features and analysis depending on the pull direction. You can change the direction of the default pull direction by clicking Pull Direction from the Design Features group in the ribbon. The reference you select causes the pull direction to become perpendicular to that reference. Keep in mind that if you modify the default pull direction within a mold model created using a template, you should rename the datum planes appropriately. The pull direction value is not parametric. This means that features built before resetting the default pull direction use the earlier direction value. They are not updated when you reset the default pull direction. Therefore, it is recommended that you not modify the pull direction after a certain point in the mold process.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating New Mold Models Close Window Mold\New Task 1:

Erase Not Displayed CREATE NEW

Create a new mold model by selecting a template.

1. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. • Select Manufacturing as the Type and Mold Cavity as the Sub-type. • Edit the Name to NEW_MOLD. • Clear the Use default template check box. • Click OK. 2. In the New File Options dialog box, click Browse. • Double-click MMNS_MFG_ MOLD.ASM. • Click OK. 3. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 4. Notice that an assembly of the same name as the mold cavity is created in the model tree. 5. Explore the default datum features created in the graphics window and model tree. 6. Notice the PULL DIRECTION.

7. In the model tree, click Show and select Layer Tree. Notice the default layers. 8. Click Show Model Tree.

and select

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 4

© 2011 PTC

9. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to access the Model Properties dialog box. 10. In the Materials section, click change in the Units row. Notice the units that are set. 11. Click Close > Close. 12. Click Named Views . Notice the default view orientations. 13. Select view orientation FRONT. 14. Notice that the PULL DIRECTION for the mold points upward from the parting plane. and 15. Click Named Views select Standard Orientation.

16. Click Pull Direction from the Design Features group in the ribbon. 17. Select datum plane MOLD_FRONT and click Okay from the menu manager.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 5

Task 2:

Create a new mold model by selecting a different template.

1. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. • Select Manufacturing as the Type and Mold Cavity as the Sub-type. • Edit the Name to NEW_MOLD_ENGLISH. • Clear the Use default template check box. • Click OK. 2. In the New File Options dialog box, select the inlbs_mfg_mold template. • Click OK. 3. Again, notice the datum features and PULL DIRECTION. 4. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties. 5. In the Materials section, click change in the Units row. Notice the units that are set. 6. Click Close > Close.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 6

© 2011 PTC

Analyzing Model Accuracy One of the most important factors affecting the mold design process is model accuracy. • Types of accuracy: – Relative – Absolute • Automatically controlling accuracy in mold model • Implications of changing accuracy • When does accuracy need to be changed?

Figure 1 – Confirmation for Automatically Changing Accuracy

Figure 2 – Viewing an Accuracy Conflict

Analyzing Model Accuracy One of the most important factors affecting the mold design process is model accuracy. Creo Parametric provides the following types of accuracy settings: • Relative – This type of accuracy is specified as a fraction of the longest diagonal of the bounding box of a model. The default relative accuracy is 0.0012. • Absolute – This type of accuracy improves the matching of models of different sizes or different accuracies (for example, imported models created on another system). To avoid potential problems when adding new features to a model, it is recommended that you set the reference model to absolute accuracy before adding additional parts to the model. Absolute accuracy is useful when you are doing the following: – Copying geometry from one mold to another during core operations. – Designing models for manufacturing and mold design. – Matching accuracy of imported geometry to its destination model. You can match the accuracies of a set of models in one of the two following ways: • Give them all the same absolute accuracies. • Designate the smallest model as the base model, and assign its accuracy to the other models.

Automatically Controlling Accuracy You can perform the following steps to automatically set the correct accuracy when creating mold models:

CREO精诚网 • Set the configuration file option enable_absolute_accuracy to yes. 中国CREO技术领航者

• Create a new mold model. It receives a default (absolute) accuracy value. © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 7

• Add the first reference model. If a discrepancy exists between the assembly model accuracy and reference model accuracy, the system issues a warning and prompts you to confirm changing the assembly model accuracy, as shown in Figure 1. If you accept, then Creo Parametric switches the assembly model accuracy from relative to absolute, and sets it to the value corresponding to the accuracy of the reference model. If you do not accept, the system warns you that there is an accuracy conflict, and generates a text file with a *.acc file extension in the working directory. • Create the mold workpiece using the automatic workpiece creation functionality. The accuracy of the workpiece is automatically set to be the same as the accuracy of the assembly model.

Implications and Guidelines of Changing Accuracy When you change the accuracy of a model you are changing the computational accuracy of geometry calculations. The accuracy of a mold model is relative to the size of the resultant molding component. The valid range for accuracy is 0.01 to 0.0001, and the default value is 0.0012. However, the configuration file option, accuracy_lower_bound, can override the lower boundary of this range. The specified values for the lower boundary must be between 0.000001 and 0.0001. If you increase the accuracy, the regeneration time also increases. Use the default accuracy unless you need to increase it. In general, you should set the accuracy to a value less than half the ratio of the length of the smallest edge on the model to the length of the largest diagonal of a box that would contain the model. Use the default accuracy until you have a reason not to do so.

Situations for Changing Accuracy The following are situations that may cause you to have to change accuracy: • Placing a small feature on a model. • Intersecting two models of very different size. For the two models to be compatible, they must have the same absolute accuracy. To achieve this, estimate each model size, and multiply each by its respective current accuracy. If the results differ, enter a value for the accuracy of the models that yields the same results for each. You might need to increase the mold accuracy of the larger model by entering a smaller decimal number. For example, if the size of the smaller model is 100 and the accuracy is .01, the product of these numbers is 1. If the size of the larger model is 1000 and the accuracy is .01, the product of these numbers is 10. Change the accuracy of the larger model to .001 to yield the same product. When an accuracy conflict exists, the system warns you in the Message Log and generate a *.acc file that is saved in the working directory. You can view this text file to determine where the conflict exists and modify the accuracies accordingly. The contents of an accuracy file are shown in Figure 2.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 8

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Model Accuracy Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Accuracy Task 1:

MFG_ACCURACY.ASM

Modify the accuracy of models in a mold model.

The purpose of this procedure is to show you how to change accuracy manually. If you specify the reference part and use automatic workpiece creation during the mold process, you are automatically prompted to change accuracy. 1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Notice the warning in the Message Log stating that there is an accuracy conflict.

3. Click Folder Browser from the Navigator and click Working . Directory • Click in the right, empty portion of the address bar to highlight its contents. • Press END, type mfg_accuracy.acc, and press ENTER. 4. Review the accuracy conflict report for the manufacturing assembly. 5. Click Web Browser collapse the browser. 6. Select Model Tree

to

from the Navigator.

7. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category. • Click Add. • Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field. • Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK > No.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 9

8. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to access the Model Properties dialog box. 9. In the Materials section, click change in the Accuracy row. 10. In the Accuracy dialog box, select Copying value from model and click Browse. 11. Double-click MFG_ ACCURACY_REF.PRT from the Open dialog box. 12. Click Regenerate Model from the Accuracy dialog box. 13. Notice that the accuracy has been changed to Absolute 0.0046. 14. Click Close from the Model Properties dialog box. 15. Right-click ACCURACY_WRK.PRT and select Open. 16. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties. 17. In the Materials section, click change in the Accuracy row. 18. In the Accuracy dialog box, select Copying value from model and click Browse. 19. Double-click MFG_ ACCURACY_REF.PRT from the Open dialog box. 20. Click Regenerate Model. 21. Notice that the accuracy has been changed to Absolute 0.0046. 22. Click Close from the Model Properties dialog box. 23. Click Close

to return to MFG_ACCURACY.ASM.

24. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK to save the manufacturing model. 25. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All and OK to erase the model from memory.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 10

© 2011 PTC

26. Click Working Directory and double-click MFG_ACCURACY.ASM to open it. 27. Notice that there is no longer an accuracy conflict in the Message Log. All components in the mold manufacturing model are set to the same absolute accuracy value.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 11

Locating the Reference Model The reference model usually represents the part that is to be molded. • Locate Reference Model: – Most versatile of the three methods available. – Specify a pre-defined Layout. – Specify a pre-defined Orientation. – Matches accuracy if absolute accuracy is enabled. • You can specify the Reference Model Type. Figure 1 – Reference Model Located into Mold Model

Figure 2 – Model Trees for Merge by Reference, Same Model, and Inherited Reference Model Types

Reference Model Background The first component you typically assemble in the mold model is the reference model. The reference model usually represents the part that is to be molded. The reference model is needed to imprint corresponding geometry on mold components. The geometry imprinted into the mold components becomes the mold cavity. The reference model geometry for a mold model is derived from the corresponding design model geometry. The design model may not always contain all necessary design elements such as drafts, fillets, and shrinkage that are required for the mold design process. Sometimes the design model contains design elements that require post-molding machining. These CREO精诚网 elements should be changed on the reference model to suit the mold design process. 中国CREO技术领航者

Module 4 | Page 12

© 2011 PTC

Locating the Reference Model Locating the reference model is one of three methods available for inserting the reference model into the mold model, and is the most versatile of the three. The reference model icon that displays in the model tree is different than that of a conventional part model, regardless of the method used to insert it. You can use Locate Reference Model to assemble a pre-existing model as the reference model into the mold model. This option enables you to further select a pre-defined Layout and Orientation for the reference model. When locating the reference model, you can specify the Reference Model Type: • Merge by Reference – Creo Parametric copies design model geometry into the reference model using an External Merge feature. Only the geometry, datum planes, and layers are copied from the design model. If a layer with one or more datum planes associated with it exists in a design model, the layer, its name, display status, and the datum planes are copied from the design model to the reference model. Any changes made to the reference model do NOT affect the original design model. The default name for the new reference model created with this method is MOLD_MODEL_NAME_REF.PRT. For example, if the mold model is CAMERA_MOLD.PRT, the new reference model is CAMERA_MOLD_REF.PRT. Any changes made to the original design model automatically propagate to the reference model. • Same Model – Creo Parametric uses the design model as the reference model. The reference model is the design model. Therefore, any changes made to this reference model do affect the design model, as you are actually modifying the original design model. As a result, you cannot rename this reference model when it is the same model as the original design model. • Inherited – The reference model inherits all geometry and feature information from the design model using an External Inheritance feature. You can specify the geometry and the feature data that you want to modify on the inherited reference model without changing the original design model. Inheritance provides greater freedom to modify the reference model without changing the design model. Any changes made to the reference model do not affect the design model. Similar to the Merge by Reference method, the default name for the new reference model created with this method is MOLD_MODEL_NAME_REF.PRT. Again, any changes made to the original design model automatically propagate to the reference model. If you have absolute accuracy enabled, the system prompts you to confirm the accuracy change that needs to occur to properly match the mold model accuracy to the reference model accuracy. When the reference model is located into the mold model, the resulting geometry in the graphics window looks the same, regardless of the method used to create the reference model. You must expand the model tree to determine the method used.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 13

PROCEDURE - Locating the Reference Model Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\/Reference-Model_Locate Task 1:

REF-MODEL_MERGE.ASM

Locate the reference model as a merge model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category. • Click Add. • Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field. • Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK > No. 3. In the ribbon, select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group. 4. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from the Open dialog box. 5. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Merge by Reference as the Reference Model Type. • Notice the Design Model. • Edit the Reference Model Name to BUTTON_REF and click OK. 6. Click OK from the Layout dialog box. 7. Click OK from the Warning dialog box to change the accuracy. 8. Click Done/Return from the menu manager. 9. Click Regenerate

.

10. Expand BUTTON_REF.PRT in the model tree. 11. Notice that the reference model only contains an external merge CREO精诚网 feature. 中国CREO技术领航者

Module 4 | Page 14

© 2011 PTC

Task 2:

Locate the reference model as the same model.

1. Click Open

and double-click REF-MODEL_SAME.ASM.

2. Select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group. 3. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from the Open dialog box. 4. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Same Model as the Reference Model Type. • Notice the Reference Model Name, and that the field is grayed out. • Click OK. 5. Click OK from the Layout dialog box. 6. Click OK from the Warning dialog box. 7. Click Done/Return from the menu manager. 8. Click Regenerate

.

9. Expand BUTTON.PRT in the model tree. 10. Notice that the reference model is the original model. Task 3:

Locate the reference model as an inheritance.

1. Click Open

and double-click REF-MODEL_INHERITED.ASM.

2. Select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group. 3. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from the Open dialog box. 4. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Inherited as the Reference Model Type. • Edit the Reference Model Name to BUTTON_REF_I and click OK.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 15

5. Click OK from the Layout dialog box. 6. Click OK from the Warning dialog box. 7. Click Done/Return from the menu manager. 8. Click Regenerate

.

9. Expand BUTTON_REF_I.PRT in the model tree. 10. Notice that the reference model only contains an external inheritance feature. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 16

© 2011 PTC

Assembling the Reference Model The reference model usually represents the part that is to be molded. • Assemble Reference Model: – Uses a previously created model. – Uses conventional assembly placement constraints. – Matches accuracy if absolute accuracy is enabled. • You can specify the Reference Model Type.

Figure 1 – Viewing the Reference Model in the Model Tree

Figure 2 – Assembling the Reference Model using Constraints

Figure 3 – Viewing the Assembled Reference Model

Reference Model Background The first component you typically assemble in the mold model is the reference model. The reference model usually represents the part that is to be molded. The reference model is needed to imprint corresponding geometry on mold components. The geometry imprinted into the mold components becomes the mold cavity. The reference model geometry for a mold model is derived from the corresponding design model geometry. The design model may not always contain all necessary design elements such as drafts, fillets, and shrinkage that are required for the mold design process. Sometimes the design model contains design elements that require post-molding machining. These elements should be changed on the reference model to suit the mold design process.

Assembling the Reference Model Assembling the reference model is one of three methods available for CREO精诚网 inserting the reference model into the mold model. The reference model icon that displays in the model tree is different than that of a conventional part 中国CREO技术领航者 model, regardless of the method used to insert it. © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 17

You can use Assemble Reference Model to assemble a pre-existing model as the reference model into the mold model. This option enables you to use conventional Assembly mode placement constraints to assemble the reference model. Unlike the Locate Reference Model option, you cannot further specify a Layout and Orientation. You can redefine the reference model, however, to specify a Layout and Orientation. Similar to the Locate Reference Model option, you can specify the Reference Model Type: • Merge by Reference – Creo Parametric copies design model geometry into the reference model using an External Merge feature. Only the geometry, datum planes, and layers are copied from the design model. If a layer with one or more datum planes associated with it exists in a design model, the layer, its name, display status, and the datum planes are copied from the design model to the reference model. Any changes made to the reference model do NOT affect the original design model. The default name for the new reference model created with this method is MOLD_MODEL_NAME_REF.PRT. For example, if the mold model is CAMERA_MOLD.PRT, the new reference model is CAMERA_MOLD_REF.PRT. Any changes made to the original design model automatically propagate to the reference model. • Same Model – Creo Parametric uses the design model as the reference model. The reference model is the design model. Therefore, any changes made to this reference model do affect the design model, as you are actually modifying the original design model. As a result, you cannot rename this reference model when it is the same model as the original design model. • Inherited – The reference model inherits all geometry and feature information from the design model using an External Inheritance feature. You can specify the geometry and the feature data that you want to modify on the inherited reference model without changing the original design model. Inheritance provides greater freedom to modify the reference model without changing the design model. Any changes made to the reference model do not affect the design model. Similar to the Merge by Reference method, the default name for the new reference model created with this method is MOLD_MODEL_NAME_REF.PRT. Again, any changes made to the original design model automatically propagate to the reference model. If you have absolute accuracy enabled, the system prompts you to confirm the accuracy change that needs to occur to properly match the mold model accuracy to the reference model accuracy. When the reference model is assembled into the mold model, the resulting geometry in the graphics window looks the same, regardless of the method used to create the reference model. You must expand the model tree to determine the method used.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 18

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Assembling the Reference Model Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Reference-Model_Assemble

REF-MODEL_ASSEMBLE.

ASM Task 1:

Assemble the reference model using placement constraints.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category. • Click Add. • Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field. • Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK > No. 3. In the ribbon, select Assemble Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group. 4. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from the Open dialog box. 5. Notice that you can now assemble the reference model using conventional placement constraints. 6. In the graphics window, select coordinate system MOLD_DEF_CSYS as the assembly reference. • Select coordinate system PRT_CSYS_DEF as the component reference. 7. Click Complete Component from the dashboard.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 19

8. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Merge by Reference as the Reference Model Type. • Edit the Reference Model Name to BUTTON_REF and click OK. 9. Click OK from the Warning dialog box to edit the accuracy.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 20

© 2011 PTC

Creating the Reference Model The reference model usually represents the part that is to be molded. • Create Reference Model: – Creates a new model on-the-fly. – Uses conventional component creation methods. – Uses conventional assembly placement constraints. • You cannot specify the Reference Model Type.

Figure 2 – Assembling the Reference Model using Constraints

Figure 1 – Viewing the Reference Model in the Model Tree

Figure 3 – Reference Model Created from Empty Template

Reference Model Background The first component you typically assemble in the mold model is the reference model. The reference model usually represents the part that is to be molded. The reference model is needed to imprint corresponding geometry on mold components. The geometry imprinted into the mold components becomes the mold cavity. The reference model geometry for a mold model is derived from the corresponding design model geometry. The design model may not always contain all necessary design elements such as drafts, fillets, and shrinkage that are required for the mold design process. Sometimes the design model contains design elements that require post-molding machining. These elements should be changed on the reference model to suit the mold design process.

Creating the Reference Model CREO精诚网

Creating the reference model is one of three methods available for inserting 中国CREO技术领航者 the reference model into the mold model and offers the least flexibility. The © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 21

reference model icon that displays in the model tree is different than that of a conventional part model, regardless of the method used to insert it. to create a new model on-the-fly You can use Create Reference Model and assemble it as the reference model into the mold model using conventional Assembly mode placement constraints. This option is similar to creating a new component in Assembly mode. In fact, the same creation options are available: • Copy From Existing – Creates a copy of an existing model. This could be an existing design model or an empty template of your company standards. • Locate Default Datums – Creates the model and enables you to locate the default datums in the assembly. • Empty – Creates the model without geometry or datum features. • Create features – Creates the model using existing assembly references. With this method you cannot specify the Reference Model Type. There are also no pre-defined options available for Layout or Orientation, and there are no further locating options or accuracy matching.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 22

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating the Reference Model Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Reference-Model_Create Task 1:

BUTTON.PRT

Create the reference model from an existing design model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Notice the model geometry. 3. Click Close

.

4. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category. • Click Add. • Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field. • Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK > No. 5. Click Open and double-click REF-MODEL_COPY-FROM. ASM. 6. In the ribbon, select Create Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group. 7. In the Component Create dialog box, edit the name to BUTTON_REF. • Click OK. 8. In the Creation Options dialog box, select Copy From Existing as the Creation Method. • Click Browse. • Double-click BUTTON.PRT. • Click OK.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 23

9. Notice that you can now assemble the reference model using conventional placement constraints. 10. Notice that the geometry was copied from the BUTTON.PRT model. 11. Enable Csys Display

.

12. In the graphics window, select coordinate system MOLD_DEF_CSYS as the assembly reference. • Select coordinate system PRT_CSYS_DEF as the component reference. 13. Click Complete Component from the dashboard. Task 2:

Create the reference model from an empty template.

1. Click Open and double-click REF-MODEL_CREATE.ASM. 2. In the ribbon, select Create Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group. 3. In the Component Create dialog box, edit the name to BUTTON_REF_NEW. • Click OK. 4. In the Creation Options dialog box, select Copy From Existing as the Creation Method. • Click Browse. • Double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT. • Click OK.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 24

© 2011 PTC

5. Notice that you can now assemble the reference model using conventional placement constraints. 6. Right-click in the graphics window and select Default Constraint.

7. Click Complete Component

from the dashboard.

You could now activate the reference model and create geometry as desired. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 25

Redefining the Reference Model You can redefine certain items related to the reference model once it is placed within the mold model. • You can redefine the following reference model related items: – Reference model orientation. – Mold cavity layout. – Mold cavity layout orientation. • You cannot change the reference model to a different reference model. • Switching reference model methods: – Inherited and Merge by Reference only. – You cannot switch between Same Model and another method.

Figure 1 – Layout Dialog Box when Redefining Reference Model

Redefining the Reference Model You can redefine the reference model by selecting Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group and then clicking Redefine from the menu manager. You can redefine the following items related to the reference model: • Reference model orientation – You can adjust the reference model origin and orientation within the mold model. You can do this by either adjusting the reference model coordinate system or the mold model's coordinate system. • Mold cavity layout – You can adjust the quantity and layout of the mold cavities created within the mold model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 26

© 2011 PTC

• Mold cavity layout orientation – You can adjust the orientation of the mold cavities created within the mold model. You cannot change the current reference model to a different reference model. You can perform these functions on reference models that were located or assembled, but not reference models that were directly created in the mold model.

Switching Reference Model Methods If you have located or assembled the reference model using the Same Model method, you cannot redefine the method to switch it to Merge by Reference or Inherited. Conversely, if you located or assembled the reference model using either Merge by Reference or Inherited, you cannot redefine the method to Same Model. In either of these cases you must delete the reference model from the mold model and recreate it. You can switch the reference model creation method back and forth between Merge by Reference and Inheritance, however. You can do this by editing the definition of the External Merge or External Inheritance feature within the reference model, depending on the type of creation method used. You can then toggle the inheritance on or off in the dashboard. Keep in mind that in switching back and forth you will lose any geometry that was varied in the inheritance feature, and the resulting geometry may change, potentially causing other geometry to fail.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 27

Analyzing Reference Model Orientation You can modify the orientation of the reference model in the mold model. • The system lines up coordinate systems from the reference model and mold model. • Modify reference model orientation: – Standard ♦ Select a coordinate system. – Dynamic ♦ Modify orientation of REF_ORIGIN. • Other dynamic options: – Projected area – Draft check – Bounding box information

Figure 1 – Using Standard Orientation

Figure 2 – Using Dynamic Orientation

Analyzing Reference Model Orientation You can modify the orientation of the reference model in the mold model. When you select the reference model to be added to the mold model, the system selects a coordinate system from the reference model and assembles it to a coordinate system from the mold model.

Modifying the Reference Model Orientation You can modify the reference model orientation within the mold model either by specifying a different mold layout coordinate system or by specifying a different reference model coordinate system. There are two different methods that you can use to specify a different coordinate system in the reference model: • Standard – Enables you to select a different, existing, coordinate system in the reference model. A separate window opens that contains the reference model, enabling you to select the coordinate system, as shown in Figure 1. • Dynamic – A separate window opens that contains the reference model. However, a new coordinate system called REF_ORIGIN is created in the reference model, and you can dynamically reorient this coordinate system so that it will line up properly with the mold layout coordinate system. CREO精诚网 In the separate window that contains the reference model, the X, Y, and 中国CREO技术领航者 Z-directions of the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system are displayed, and Module 4 | Page 28

© 2011 PTC

the positive Z-direction is the same as the PULL DIRECTION in the mold model. Also, the Parting Plane displays to show you a surface perpendicular to the pull direction. Figure 2 shows the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system orientation and Parting Plane and the resulting orientation in the mold model. You can dynamically adjust the coordinate system orientation in the reference model window, and the parting plane also adjusts dynamically. The following options are available for adjusting the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system orientation: – Rotate – Enables you to rotate the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system about the X, Y, and Z axes, either by typing a value or by dragging a slider. – Translate – Enables you to translate the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system in the X, Y, and Z directions, either by typing a value or by dragging a slider. – Move To Point – Enables you to move the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system origin to a specified point in the reference model. There are two options available: ♦ Selection – Enables you to select a vertex, datum point, or other coordinate system as the new coordinate system origin. ♦ Model Center – Moves the coordinate system origin to the model center. – Align Axis – Enables you to align the X, Y, or Z Axis of the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system to a specified datum plane, curve, edge, axis, or other coordinate system.

Reference Model Dynamic Orientation Options When you are dynamically reorienting the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system, the following additional options are available within the Ref Model Orientation dialog box: • Projected Area – Determines the area projected onto the Parting Plane as defined by current orientation of the reference model in the mold model. The Projected Area is calculated based on the current orientation after Update is clicked. • Undo/Redo – Enables you to undo or redo the last action performed.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 29

• Draft Check – Enables a draft angle to be specified and performs a draft check on the reference model's current orientation by clicking Shade. This shades the model like a conventional draft check with the three colors blue, magenta, and yellow.

Figure 3 – Draft Check • Bounding Box information – Provides positive and negative distances from the model origin to the edges of the bounding box. This information updates as the part is moved and cannot be edited.

Figure 4 – Bounding Box Information

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 30

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Reference Model Orientation Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Reference-Model_Orientation Task 1:

REF-ORIENT.ASM

Orient the reference model using dynamic orientation.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. The model is not in proper orientation with respect to the PULL DIRECTION. 3. Select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group. 4. Click Redefine from the menu manager. 5. Click Reference Model Origin from the Layout dialog box. 6. Click Dynamic from the menu manager. 7. Notice the Parting Plane and the positive Z-direction.

8. In the Ref Model Orientation dialog box, verify that Rotate is specified for the X Axis. • Drag the slider to the right until about 90, then edit the Value to 90 and press ENTER. • Notice the Parting Plane and the positive Z-direction. • Click OK.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 31

9. Click Preview. 10. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 11. Enable Plane Tag Display

.

12. Select the Mold tab. 13. Notice that the orientation is now correct for the PULL DIRECTION, but that the MAIN_PARTING_PLN is on the top of the model. 14. Click Reference Model Origin from the Layout dialog box. 15. Click Dynamic from the menu manager. 16. In the Ref Model Orientation dialog box, click Translate and select the Z Axis. • Drag the slider all the way to the left so the Value is -7.00 and notice the Parting Plane. • Click OK. 17. Click Preview from the Layout dialog box. 18. Notice that the MAIN_PARTING_ PLN is now on the bottom. 19. Click OK from the Layout dialog box and Done/Return from the menu manager. Task 2:

Orient the reference model using standard orientation.

1. In the model tree, expand REF-MODEL.PRT. 2. At the top of the model tree, click Settings Filters.

and select Tree

3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed Objects check box and click OK. 4. Right-click STD_CSYS and select Resume.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 32

© 2011 PTC

5. Click Locate Reference Model and click Redefine from the menu manager. 6. Click Reference Model Origin from the Layout dialog box. 7. Verify that the coordinate system type is Standard in the menu manager. 8. Select coordinate system STD_CSYS. 9. Click OK from the Layout dialog box. 10. Click Done/Return from the menu manager. 11. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 12. Disable Plane Tag Display

.

13. Select the Mold tab. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 33

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout You can create a mold model that contains multiple cavities. • The following mold cavity layout options are available: – Single – Rectangular – Circular – Variable

Figure 1 – Single Cavity Mold Model Layout

Figure 2 – Rectangular Cavity Mold Model Layout

Figure 3 – Circular Cavity Mold Model Layout

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout You can create a mold model that contains multiple cavities. When you create a multiple-cavity layout in the mold model, the system creates a pattern of the reference model to create the multiple cavities. The following layout options are available: • Single – Places a single cavity, or single instance, of the reference model in the mold model. A Single cavity layout is shown in Figure 1. • Rectangular – Places the reference model in a rectangular layout in the mold model. A Rectangular cavity layout is shown in Figure 2. The following options are available for the Rectangular layout: – Cavities – Specifies the number of cavities, or number of pattern instances of the reference model, in the X and Y directions. You can either edit the number or use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the number of cavities in each direction. – Increment – Specifies the distance between origins of reference models inCREO精诚网 the X and Y directions. The X and Y directions are determined by the mold model coordinate 中国CREO技术领航者 system's X and Y axes. Module 4 | Page 34

© 2011 PTC

• Circular – Places the reference model in a circular layout in the mold model. A Circular cavity layout is shown in Figure 3. The following options are available for the Circular layout: – Cavities – Specifies the number of cavities, or number of pattern instances of the reference model, in the mold model. – Radius – Specifies the radius value around which the cavities are placed. – Start Angle – Specifies the angular distance in degrees about the mold model's Z-axis that the first reference model's origin is placed. You can specify a negative value. – Increment – Specifies the angular distance between cavities in degrees. • Variable – Enables you to place the reference model according to a user-defined pattern table.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 35

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Cavity-Layout Task 1:

CAVITY-LAYOUT.ASM

Analyze mold cavity layout in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Notice that the mold model is a single cavity mold.

3. Select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group. 4. Click Redefine from the menu manager. 5. Notice that the current Layout specified is Single. 6. Select Rectangular as the Layout. • Edit the X Cavity to 3. • Edit the Y Cavity to 3. • Edit the X Increment to 30. • Edit the Y Increment to 30. 7. Click Preview. 8. In the model tree, expand the Pattern feature. 9. Notice that there are 9 pattern members total. 10. These pattern members correspond with the number of cavities in the mold model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 36

© 2011 PTC

11. In the Layout dialog box, edit the X and Y Increments to 50. • Click Preview.

12. In the Layout dialog box, edit the number of Y Cavities to 2. • Click Preview.

13. In the Layout dialog box, select Circular as the Layout. • Edit the number of Cavities to 4. • Edit the Radius to 40 and click Preview.

14. Edit the Start Angle to 30 and click Preview. 15. Notice that all four mold cavities rotated 30 degrees about the Z-axis.

16. Edit the Start Angle back to 0. 17. Edit the Increment to 60 and click OK from the Layout dialog box. 18. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.

This completes the procedure. CREO精诚网

中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 37

Analyzing Variable Mold Cavity Layout You can create unique cavity layouts using the Variable layout option. • Convert an existing layout to Variable. • The following orientation options are available: – Reference Rotation – X-Translation – Y-Translation – Layout Rotation • Additional options: – Highlight – Add/Remove pattern instance

Figure 1 – Variable Cavity Converted from Circular Layout

Figure 2 – Variable Cavity Converted from Single Layout

Analyzing Variable Mold Cavity Layout You can create unique cavity layouts using the Variable layout option. When you select the Variable option, the existing cavity layout is converted to the Variable format, and the Variable table appears in the Layout dialog box. Each pattern instance (reference model) displays in the left-most column, and the variables that vary orientation are displayed in the right columns, as shown in the figures. At this point, you can adjust the orientation for each pattern member independently of the others. The following orientation options are available for each pattern instance in the Variable table: • Reference Rotation instance) about its origin.

— Rotates the reference model (pattern

CREO精诚网

• 中国CREO技术领航者 X-Translation — Translates the reference model along its positive or negative X-axis. Module 4 | Page 38

© 2011 PTC

• Y-Translation or negative Y-axis. • Layout Rotation origin.

— Translates the reference model along its positive — Rotates reference model about mold layout

Of these four options, the Y-Translation and Layout Rotation options are not always available, depending upon which layout was converted to Variable. The Layout Rotation option is only available for a layout converted from Circular, as shown in Figure 1. The Y-Translation option is only available for a layout converted from Single or Rectangular, as shown in Figure 2. Additional Variable cavity layout options include the following: • Highlight — When this check box is selected, any pattern instance selected in the Variable table highlights in the graphics window. • Add — Enables you to add a new pattern instance to the layout. The new pattern instance member is inserted immediately following the pattern instance that is selected when the Add button is clicked. • Remove — Enables you to remove an existing pattern instance from the layout. To remove a pattern instance, select it in the Variable table and click Remove.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 39

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Variable Mold Cavity Layout Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Cavity-Layout_Variable Task 1:

VARIABLE-LAYOUT.ASM

Create a variable cavity layout.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-down menu and click Redefine from the menu manager. 3. Notice that the Layout is a Single cavity. 4. In the Layout dialog box, select Variable as the Layout. • Notice the new Variable table. • Select the Highlight check box. • Select VARIABLE-LAYOUT_ REF and notice that it highlights in the graphics window. 5. In the Variable table, edit the Reference Rotation 90.

to

• Edit the X-Translation to -40. • Edit the Y-Translation to -40 and click Preview. 6. In the Layout dialog box, click Add. • Edit the Reference Rotation to -90. • Edit the X-Translation to -40. •CREO精诚网 Edit the Y-Translation to 40 and click Preview. 中国CREO技术领航者

Module 4 | Page 40

© 2011 PTC

7. In the Variable table, select the second pattern instance and click Add. • Edit the Reference Rotation to -90. • Edit the X-Translation to 50. • Edit the Y-Translation to -40 and click Preview. 8. In the Variable table, select the third pattern instance and click Add. • Edit the Reference Rotation to 90. • Edit the X-Translation to -50. • Edit the Y-Translation to -40 and click Preview. Task 2:

Modify the variable cavity layout to a different layout.

1. In the Layout dialog box, select Circular as the Layout, edit the Radius to 60, and click Preview. 2. Select Variable as the Layout. 3. In the Variable table, select the first pattern instance and edit the Reference Rotation

to

-90, the X-Translation to 60, and the Layout Rotation to 0. 4. Edit the remaining pattern instance orientation values, as shown in the table.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 41

5. Click OK from the Layout dialog box. 6. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 42

© 2011 PTC

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation You can adjust the orientation of the cavities in a multi-cavity layout. • Available orientations for the following cavity layouts: – Single ♦ Specify a different coordinate system – Rectangular ♦ Constant ♦ X-Symmetric ♦ Y-Symmetric – Circular ♦ Constant ♦ Radial

Figure 1 – Rectangular Layout, X-Symmetric versus Y-Symmetric Orientation

Figure 2 – Circular Layout, Constant versus Radial Orientation

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation You can adjust the orientation of the cavities in a multi-cavity layout. Examples of reasons why cavity adjustment may be necessary include the following: • More optimum layout for sprue and runner placement is required. • More uniform cooling of parts is needed. • Manufacturing feasibility of the mold design layout. Consider each of the mold cavity layouts and their respective options for orientation.

Modifying Layout Orientation in a Single Cavity Because there is only a single cavity, no further orientation adjustments are available. The Orientation options become grayed out in the Layout dialog box. Rather, you can adjust the cavity orientation in the layout by switching coordinate systems or dynamically adjusting the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system.

Modifying Layout Orientation in a Rectangular Cavity The following Orientation options are available for the Rectangular cavity CREO精诚网 layout:

中国CREO技术领航者

• Constant – Cavities are arranged to all point in the same direction. © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 43

• X-Symmetric – Cavities are mirrored about the mold model's X-axis. That is, the cavities are arranged so that they appear in the same orientation when looking out from a plane that runs along the mold model's X-axis. X-Symmetric orientation is shown in the left image of Figure 1. • Y-Symmetric – Cavities are mirrored about the mold model's Y-axis. That is, the cavities are arranged so that they appear in the same orientation when looking out from a plane that runs along the mold model's Y-axis. Y-Symmetric orientation is shown in the right image of Figure 1.

Modifying Layout Orientation in a Circular Cavity The following Orientation options are available for the Circular cavity layout: • Constant – Cavities are arranged to all point in the same direction, as shown in the left image of Figure 2. • Radial – Cavities are fanned about the mold model's origin. That is, the cavities are arranged so that they appear in the same orientation when looking out radially from the mold model origin. Radial orientation is shown in the right image of Figure 2.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 44

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Cavity-Layout_Orientation Task 1:

LAYOUT-ORIENT.ASM

Analyze mold cavity layout orientation in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Select Locate Reference Model from the Reference Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group. 3. Click Redefine from the menu manager. 4. In the Layout dialog box, notice that the Layout is specified as Rectangular. • Notice that the Orientation is specified as Constant. 5. In the Layout dialog box, edit the Orientation to X-Symmetric. • Click Preview. • Notice that the cavity layout is symmetric about the mold model's X-axis.

6. In the Layout dialog box, edit the Orientation to Y-Symmetric. • Click Preview. 7. Notice that the cavity layout is symmetric about the mold model's Y-axis.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 45

8. In the Layout dialog box, edit the Layout to Circular. • Edit the Orientation to Constant if necessary. • Edit the Radius to 30. • Click Preview. 9. Notice that the cavities all face the same constant direction.

10. In the Layout dialog box, edit the Orientation to Radial. • Click Preview. 11. Notice that the cavity layout is radial about the mold model's origin.

12. In the Layout dialog box, edit the Layout to Single. • Notice that all Orientation options are grayed out. • Click OK. 13. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 46

© 2011 PTC

Calculating Projected Area You can calculate the projected area of the reference model to help calculate the clamping force needed to keep a mold set closed during operation. • Specify the entity. • Specify the projection direction. • Projected area is calculated.

Figure 1 – Calculating Projected Area

Figure 2 – Illustration of Projected Area

Calculating Projected Area You can calculate the projected area of the reference model to help calculate the clamping force needed to keep a mold set closed during operation. To calculate the projected area, you can click Projected Area Analysis group. This opens the Measure dialog box.

from the

In the Measure dialog box, you must specify the following items: • Entity – Specifies the entity that is to be projected. You can select the following entity types: – All Ref Parts – This is the default Entity selection. – Surface – Quilt – Facets • Projection Direction – Specifies the direction that the Entity is projected. You can specify any of the following projection direction references: – Default Pull Direction – This is the default Projection Direction. – None – Plane – Enables you to select a plane that the direction is perpendicular CREO精诚网 to. 中国CREO技术领航者 – Line/Axis – Enables you to select a line or axis as the direction. © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 47

– Coordinate System – Enables you to select a coordinate system. Once you select the coordinate system, you must specify which coordinate axis defines the direction. – View Plane – Uses the current viewing plane as the projection reference. Once you have defined the entity and projection direction, you can click Compute to calculate the projected area of the entity. The selected entity is projected onto an imaginary plane that is perpendicular to the projection reference, as shown in Figure 2. The area of this projection is calculated.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 48

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Calculating Projected Area Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Projected-Area Task 1:

PROJ-AREA.ASM

Calculate the projected area of a reference model in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Projected Area the Analysis group.

from

3. In the Measure dialog box, notice that the default Entity is All Ref Parts. • Notice that the default Projection Direction is Default Pull Direction. • Notice the projected area of the reference model.

4. Enable Plane Display

.

5. In the Measure dialog box, edit the Projection Direction to Plane. • Prehighlight datum plane MOLD_FRONT and then select it. • Click Compute. • Notice the updated projected area. • Click Close.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 4 | Page 49

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 4 | Page 50

© 2011 PTC

Module

5

Shrinkage Module Overview You apply shrinkage to accommodate the contraction that occurs in the reference model during cooling, and also ensure that the final mold model matches the original design model. In this module, you learn about shrinkage and how to apply it to the reference model.

Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to: • Understand the purpose of shrinkage. • Apply shrinkage by scale to the reference model. • Apply shrinkage by dimensions to the reference model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 5 | Page 1

Understanding Shrinkage You can apply shrinkage to a model to compensate for the shrinkage that tends to occur as a molded part cools. • There are two methods to apply shrinkage: – Shrinkage by Scale – Shrinkage by Dimension • Formula options: – 1+S – 1/1–S – Where S is the shrinkage ratio • You can view the Shrink Info for the applied shrinkage.

Figure 1 – Shrinkage Dialog Boxes

Understanding Shrinkage When a molded part is removed from a mold, it tends to shrink in size as it cools down to room temperature. The amount of shrinkage that occurs in a molding is highly dependent on part geometry, mold configuration, and processing conditions. Because the mold components are designed from the reference model, you must consider the shrinkage of the material in the reference model before you proceed with the rest of the mold design process. This typically means that you proportionally increase dimensions of the reference model so that the mold components created are of the pre-shrunk molding size. You can apply shrinkage to the reference model in Mold mode. Depending on the method of applying shrinkage and the method used to assemble the reference model, the shrinkage feature may propagate to the design model. Creo Parametric uses the following formulae to calculate shrinkage: • 1+S — Uses a precalculated shrinkage factor that is based on the original geometry of the reference model. • 1/(1–S) — Enables you to specify a shrinkage factor that is based upon the final geometry of the reference model once shrinkage is applied. In the above formulae, S is the shrinkage ratio specified. There are two different methods to apply shrinkage:

CREO精诚网

• 中国CREO技术领航者 Shrinkage by Dimension • Shrinkage by Scale Module 5 | Page 2

© 2011 PTC

Viewing Shrinkage Information When shrinkage has been applied to a reference model, you can view the information regarding the shrinkage by clicking the Analysis group drop-down . An information window menu and selecting Shrinkage Information appears, providing you with the following details: • Model name — Specifies the name of the model that shrinkage was applied to. • Shrinkage method — Specifies whether the model is shrunk by scaling or by dimension. • Shrinkage formula — Specifies which formula was used to apply the shrinkage to the model. • Model Dimensions and Shrinkage Value — When shrinkage has been applied by dimensions, these specify which dimensions the shrinkage was applied to and the shrinkage value applied to each dimension. • Shrink coordinate system — Specifies the coordinate system specified when shrinkage is applied by scaling. • Shrink factors — Specifies the shrink scaling factors used when shrinkage is applied by scaling.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 5 | Page 3

Applying Shrinkage by Scale You can shrink part geometry by scaling it in relation to coordinate system directions. • You can apply shrinkage by scale to all three directions uniformly. – Isotropic • You can apply different shrinkage ratios to each of the three coordinate system directions. – X-Direction – Y-Direction – Z-Direction Figure 1 – Model Before Shrinkage Applied

Figure 2 – Isotropic Shrinkage by Scale Applied

Figure 3 – Different Shrinkage Ratios Applied to Different Directions

Applying Shrinkage by Scale The Shrinkage by Scale method enables you to shrink the part geometry by scaling it in relation to a coordinate system. You can specify different shrinkage ratios for the X, Y, and Z-coordinates. If you apply shrinkage in Mold mode, it applies only to the reference model and does not affect the design model. Shrinkage by scale is applied by creating a new shrinkage feature. When you apply shrinkage in Mold mode, the shrinkage feature is created in the reference model, not in the design model, unless the Same Model option was used when assembling the reference model into the mold model. To apply shrinkage by scale, you must specify the following items: • Coordinate System — Specify the model coordinate system that the shrinkage feature uses as a reference. The X, Y, and Z-directions of the coordinate system determine the X, Y, and Z-directions used for the CREO精诚网 shrinkage ratio. 中国CREO技术领航者 • Formula — Specify the formula you want to use to calculate shrinkage. Module 5 | Page 4

© 2011 PTC

• Shrink Ratio — Specifies the ratio of shrinkage you want to apply. The following options are available when applying shrinkage by scale: • Isotropic — When enabled, sets the same shrinkage ratio for the X, Y, and Z-directions. You can clear this check box to specify a different shrinkage ratio for each of the three directions. • Forward References — When enabled, the shrinkage does not create new geometry but changes the existing geometry so that all existing references continue to be part of the model. You can clear this check box to have the system create new geometry for the part on which shrinkage is being applied.

Considerations when Applying Shrinkage by Scale When applying shrinkage by scale in Mold mode, keep the following in mind: • A negative shrinkage ratio shrinks the dimension, while a positive shrinkage ratio expands it. For example, a positive 0.02 shrinkage ratio applied with the 1+S formula expands all the model dimensions by 2 percent, while a negative 0.02 shrinkage ratio shrinks all the model dimensions by 2 percent. • It is never reflected in the design model, unless the design model is the reference model. • If it is applied to the design model in Part mode, then the shrinkage feature belongs to the design model, not to the reference model. Shrinkage is accurately reflected by the reference model geometry, but it cannot be cleared in Mold mode. • It should be applied prior to the definition of parting surfaces or volumes. • It affects part geometry (surfaces and edges) and datum features (including curves, axes, planes, and points).

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 5 | Page 5

PROCEDURE - Applying Shrinkage by Scale Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Shrinkage_Scale Task 1:

SHRINKAGE_SCALE.ASM

Apply shrinkage by scale to a reference model.

The shrinkage ratios specified in this procedure are not representative of real-world shrinkage ratios. Higher ratios are used so that you can actually see that the geometry changes, due to applying shrinkage. 1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. In the model tree, expand reference model SHRINKAGE_SCALE.PRT. 3. Right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. 4. Notice the three feature dimensions.

5. Select Shrink by scale from the Shrinkage types drop-down menu in the Modifiers group. 6. Select coordinate system PRT_CSYS_DEF. 7. In the Shrinkage By Scale dialog box, select 1+S as the Formula, if necessary. • Verify that the Isotropic check box is selected. • Edit the Shrink Ratio to 0.5. . • Click Preview Feature 8. Notice that the entire model uniformly gets larger.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 5 | Page 6

© 2011 PTC

9. In the Shrinkage By Scale dialog box, clear the Isotropic check box. • Edit the X Shrink Ratio to 0.25. • Edit the Y Shrink Ratio to 0.25. • Edit the Z Shrink Ratio to 0.75. • Click OK . 10. Notice that the model has grown larger in the Z-coordinate system direction than in the other two directions.

11. Right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. 12. Notice that even though shrinkage was applied, the original dimensions remain unchanged.

13. Click the Analysis group drop-down menu and select Shrinkage Information . 14. Notice the shrinkage information in the information window. • Click Close.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 5 | Page 7

15. Right-click Shrinkage id 4566 and select Edit definition. 16. In the Shrinkage By Scale dialog box, select 1/1-S Formula. • Click OK .

as the

17. Notice that the resulting geometry is even more distorted. 18. The shrinkage is based on the final geometry now that shrinkage is applied.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 5 | Page 8

© 2011 PTC

Applying Shrinkage by Dimension You can specify one shrinkage ratio for all model dimensions, or specify unique ratios for individual model dimensions. • Dimensions with shrinkage ratios applied appear magenta in the graphics window. • Select individual feature dimensions to add shrinkage ratios to. • Select a feature to add shrinkage ratios to all of its dimensions.

Figure 1 – Model Before Shrinkage Applied

Figure 2 – Shrinkage Ratio Applied to All Dimensions

Figure 3 – Different Shrinkage Ratios Applied to Specific Dimensions

Applying Shrinkage by Dimension The Shrinkage by Dimension method enables you to set up one shrinkage ratio for all model dimensions, and specify ratios for individual dimensions. To apply shrinkage by dimension, you must specify the following items: • Formula — Specify the formula you want to use to calculate shrinkage. • Dimensions — Specify which dimensions to add shrinkage to. • Shrinkage Ratio — Specifies the ratio of shrinkage you want to apply. Within the Shrinkage By Dimension dialog box, a table displays the following columns: • Dimensions — Displays which dimensions have a shrinkage ratio applied. The dimension symbol and original value are displayed in the cell. • Ratio — Displays the shrinkage ratio for each dimension in the table. • Final value — Displays the final dimension value once the shrinkage ratio has been applied. CREO精诚网 You can specify a shrinkage ratio for All Dimensions in the model. The shrinkage ratio is in the first row of the Shrinkage Ratio table. In Figure 2, a 中国CREO技术领航者 shrinkage ratio of 0.5 has been applied to all dimensions. © 2011 PTC

Module 5 | Page 9

To add additional dimensions to the table, you can use the following methods: — Displays the dimensions for a • Insert Selected Dimensions selected feature, enabling you to select and apply the desired shrinkage ratio. In Figure 3, the 3 hole diameter dimension has had a shrinkage ratio applied to it. • Insert All Dimensions From Feature — Enables you to select a feature in the graphics window. All dimensions comprising that feature are automatically added to the table. In Figure 3, all three dimensions of the main extrude feature have had a shrinkage ratio applied. • You can also click Add New Row and type the symbol for the dimension. You can see what a given dimension's symbol is by clicking Toggle Dimensions

.

The following options are available when applying shrinkage by dimension: • Change Dimensions of Design Part — Determines whether the shrinkage feature is placed in the design model. Depending on the method of reference model creation, this option may be grayed out. For example, if the reference model was created using the Same Model, this option does nothing, as the feature is created in the design model regardless.

Considerations when Applying Shrinkage by Dimension When applying shrinkage by dimension, keep the following in mind: • A negative shrinkage ratio shrinks the dimension, while a positive shrinkage ratio expands it. For example, a positive 0.02 shrinkage ratio applied with the 1+S formula expands all the model dimensions by 2 percent, while a negative 0.02 shrinkage ratio shrinks all the model dimensions by 2 percent. • If the part has had shrinkage applied, dimensions display in magenta when viewed in the design model or a drawing, as shown in Figures 2 and 3. • If the part has not had shrinkage applied, dimensions remain displayed in black when viewed in the design model or a drawing. • Shrinkage by dimension values is not cumulative. For example, if you specify 1.5 as the All Dimensions shrinkage ratio for a model with 10 as the value of all its dimensions, and then specify a separate shrinkage ratio of 2.0 for the length dimension, then the final length is 20 (i.e. 10*2.0), not 30 (i.e. (10*1.5)*2.0). Individual shrinkage values for dimensions always supersede the overall model shrink value. • The configuration file option, shrinkage_value_display, determines how dimensions are displayed when shrinkage is applied to a model. The possible values of this configuration option are percent_shrink and final_value. For the procedure, the value for this configuration option is percent_shrink. • By default, whenever a part has shrinkage information associated with it, the nominal dimension values are displayed, followed by the shrinkage value in parentheses. If you set the value of the configuration file option shrinkage_value_display to percent_shrink, shrinkage is represented as CREO精诚网 percentage of the nominal dimension. You can display the final value of the shrunken dimensions by changing the value of the configuration file option 中国CREO技术领航者 shrinkage_value_display to final_value. Module 5 | Page 10

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Applying Shrinkage by Dimension Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Shrinkage_Dimension Task 1:

SHRINKAGE_DIM.ASM

Apply shrinkage by dimension to a reference model.

The shrinkage ratios specified in this procedure are not representative of real-world shrinkage ratios. Higher ratios are used so that you can actually see that the geometry changes, due to applying shrinkage. 1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, expand reference model SHRINKAGE_DIM.PRT. 3. Right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. 4. Notice the three feature dimensions.

5. Select Shrink by dimension from the Shrinkage types drop-down menu in the Modifiers group. 6. In the Shrinkage By Dimension dialog box, verify that the Formula is 1+S . • Edit the ratio to 0.5 for All Dimensions, and click OK

.

7. Notice that the model gets uniformly larger. 8. Click in the background to de-select all geometry. 9. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. 10. Notice that the dimensions are magenta and display the percent increase they have undergone. 11. In the model tree, select Round CREO精诚网 1.

中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 5 | Page 11

12. Click Shrink by dimension . • Edit the ratio to -0.5 for All Dimensions, and click OK . 13. Click in the background to de-select all geometry. 14. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. • Select Round 1. 15. Notice that the dimensions are magenta and display the percent decrease they have undergone. 16. Click Shrink by dimension . • Edit the ratio to 0.0 for All Dimensions. • Click Insert Selected and select Dimensions Hole 1. • Select the 3 dimension. • Click Insert All Dimensions From Feature . • Select Extrude 1. 17. In the Shrinkage Ratio table, edit the ratio for dimension d6 to 0.5. • Edit the d1 ratio to 0.75. • Edit the d2 ratio to 0.15. • Edit the d0 ratio to 0.75. • Notice the final values for each of the dimensions in the table and click OK . 18. Click in the background to de-select all geometry. 19. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. • Select Hole 1. 20. Notice the different individual percentage shrinkage increases. This completes the procedure. CREO精诚网

中国CREO技术领航者

Module 5 | Page 12

© 2011 PTC

Module

6

Workpieces Module Overview Once you have created the mold model, you can create and assemble the workpiece. The workpiece represents the full volume of all the mold components that are needed to create the completed mold model. You can also apply style states to the workpiece to make them transparent within the mold model. In this module, you learn how to create and assemble workpieces in a mold model.

Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to: • Create style states. • Create a workpiece automatically. • Create a custom automatic workpiece. • Create and assemble a workpiece manually. • Reclassify mold model components.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 6 | Page 1

Creating Style States Using the View Manager Create a style state in an assembly to capture components in various displays and visibilities. • Style states are only created in assemblies. • You can set individual model display (shaded, transparent, wireframe, hidden line, no hidden) independent of the rest of the assembly or other components.

Figure 1 – Style State Example

Style States Theory A style state is a captured state of component visibility in an assembly. You can vary component visibility independently of other components. For example, you can set one component to be displayed as shaded, set another to be displayed as wireframe, and set still another to be displayed as no hidden. In Figure 1, the component display of the cylinder head has been edited, while the remainder of the assembly remains shaded. If you redefine a style state you can also edit its component display to “blank,” or turn off, the display of any component in the assembly.

Creating a Style State To create a new style state, click New in the Style tab of the view manager. If desired, edit the default style name and press ENTER. The Edit dialog box opens, enabling you to blank (or, in other words, turn off) components from the graphics window. You can select components either from the graphics windowCREO精诚网 or from the model tree. You can also select the Show tab and then set the method of model display. As you select components, their model 中国CREO技术领航者 display changes to the method currently selected in the Edit dialog box. Module 6 | Page 2

© 2011 PTC

As you define component visibilities and displays, the model tree displays which settings have been specified for the components. When you finish creating the style state, the graphics window displays the name of the style state in the bottom left corner. You can also create style states by first editing component displays, and then capturing the displays in a style state. There are two default style states in every assembly: Default Style and Master Style. The Master Style cannot be modified, but the Default Style can be modified.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 6 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating Style States Using the View Manager Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

View\Style_States Task 1:

STYLE_STATES.ASM

Create a style state using the view manager.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the graphics window, select the CYLINDER_4.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > No Hidden.

5. Click View Manager the In Graphics toolbar.

from

6. In the view manager, select the Style tab. • Right-click Master Style(+) and select Save. 7. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Style name to Cyl_No_Hidden and click OK. 8. In the view manager, double-click Master Style. • Double-click Cyl_No_Hidden.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 6 | Page 4

© 2011 PTC

Task 2:

Create another style state based on the CYL_NO_HIDDEN style state.

1. In the graphics window, press and hold CTRL and select the ENG_BLOCK_FRONT_4.PRT and ENG_BLOCK_REAR_4. PRT. 2. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Transparent. 3. In the view manager, right-click Cyl_No_Hidden(+) and select Save. 4. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Style name to Castings_Transparent and click OK. 5. In the view manager, double-click Master Style. 6. Click Close.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 6 | Page 5

Creating a Workpiece Automatically The workpiece is a model that represents the full volume of all the mold components that are needed to create the final mold model. • The workpiece displays transparent green in the graphics window. • The automatic workpiece accuracy is automatically matched to the reference model. • Create multiple shapes: – Standard Rectangular – Standard Round – Custom

Figure 1 – Viewing the Workpiece in the Model Tree

Figure 2 – Standard Rectangular Workpiece

Figure 3 – Standard Round Workpiece

Creating a Workpiece Automatically Once you assemble the reference model into the mold model, you typically create and assemble the workpiece next. The workpiece is a model that represents the full volume of all the mold components (cavity, core, and inserts) that are needed to create the final mold model. The workpiece icon that displays in the model tree is different than that of a conventional part model and the reference model, as shown in Figure 1. The workpiece displays transparent green in the graphics window. To create a workpiece automatically, select Automatic Workpiece from the Workpiece types drop-down menu. The workpiece is automatically assembled to the Mold Origin coordinate system using the Coord Sys assembly constraint, and the accuracy is automatically set to match that of the reference model. To create an automatic workpiece, you must specify the following items: CREO精诚网

• 中国CREO技术领航者 Mold Origin — The Mold Origin is a mold model coordinate system from which directions are determined for workpiece creation. Module 6 | Page 6

© 2011 PTC

• Shape — Determines the shape of the workpiece. The system creates a workpiece with the minimum dimensions that the reference model fits in, within the specified shape. The following options are available: – Standard Rectangular — Creates a rectangular-shaped workpiece using , as shown in Figure 2. Create Rectangular Workpiece – Standard Round — Creates a round-shaped workpiece using Create , as shown in Figure 3. Round Workpiece – Custom — Creates a custom-shaped workpiece using Create Custom . Workpiece • Units — Specify the system of units for the workpiece. You can select inches or millimeters. • Offsets — Enables you to specify the offset values that should be added to the dimensions of the workpiece, based on the mold origin. The offsets depend on the shape of the workpiece that you have selected. You can specify each offset individually, or specify all offsets uniformly. The following offset options are available: – X direction — Adds material in the positive or negative X direction. This offset is available for only the Standard Rectangular shape and some custom shapes. – Y direction — Adds material in the positive or negative Y direction. This offset is available for only the Standard Rectangular shape and some custom shapes. – Z direction — Adds material in the positive or negative Z direction. – Radial — Adds material in the positive radial direction. – Uniform Offsets — Adds material in the positive and negative X, Y, and Z directions, and Radial, where applicable. • Overall Dimensions — The overall dimensions get updated when you specify offset values. However, you can also specify the overall dimensions, and the offset values get updated automatically. You can manually specify the X and Y dimensions for rectangular and custom workpieces, and the Diameter for rounded workpieces, to customize the workpiece size. You can manually specify the Z Cavity and Z Core dimensions for all workpieces to customize the size. • Translate Workpiece — Enables you to specify the translation values for the X and Y directions in order to position the workpiece around the reference model. You can modify the default Workpiece Name. The Workpiece Name is the name of the workpiece component as it displays in the model tree. By default, its name is of the format MOLD-MODEL-NAME_WRK, as shown in Figure 1.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 6 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Creating a Workpiece Automatically Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Workpiece_Auto Task 1:

AUTO-WRKPIECE_RECT.ASM

Create a rectangular workpiece in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Automatic Workpiece from the Workpiece types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group. 3. Select coordinate system MOLD_DEF_CSYS from the model tree. 4. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, notice the name of the workpiece. 5. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, click Create Rectangular Workpiece if necessary. • Verify that the units are mm. • Notice that there are no Offsets specified. • Notice the Overall X, Y, and Z dimensions. • Click Preview. 6. Notice that the workpiece just barely covers the reference model. 7. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, edit the Uniform Offsets value to 30. • Notice that the X, Y, and Z direction +/- offsets all become 30. • Notice that the Overall dimensions' values have also updated automatically. CREO精诚网 • Click Preview.

中国CREO技术领航者 Module 6 | Page 8

© 2011 PTC

8. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, type 40 for the - and + offsets in the Y direction. • Click Preview.

9. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, edit the Overall X Dimension to 340. • Edit the Overall Y Dimension to 160. • Notice that the Offset values have updated. • Click OK. Task 2:

Create a round workpiece in a mold model.

1. Click Open and double-click AUTO-WRKPIECE_ROUND. ASM. 2. Select Automatic Workpiece from the Workpiece types drop-down menu and select MOLD_DEF_CSYS. 3. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, click Create Round . Workpiece • Edit the Radial Offset to 5. • Edit the +Z Cavity to 6. • Edit the -Z Core to 6. • Click Preview.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 6 | Page 9

4. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, drag the Translate Workpiece X direction slider to the right. • Drag the Translate Workpiece Y direction slider to the left and click Preview. 5. In the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, edit the X and Y Translate Workpiece Directions to 0 and click OK. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 6 | Page 10

© 2011 PTC

Creating a Custom Automatic Workpiece A custom automatic workpiece enables you to add flanges to the top and bottom of the workpiece and rounds or chamfers to the vertical edges. • The process is the same as creating a rectangular or round workpiece. • The default custom shape for a custom workpiece is BLOCK_XY_FLANGES. • Many other shapes are available.

Figure 1 – BLOCK_XY_FLANGES Custom Workpiece

Figure 2 – CHAMF_XY_BOT_ FLANGE Custom Workpiece

Figure 3 – BAR_TOP_FLANGE Custom Workpiece

Creating a Custom Automatic Workpiece In addition to a Standard Rectangular and Standard Round automatic workpiece, you can also create a custom workpiece. A custom automatic workpiece enables you to add flanges to the top and bottom of the workpiece. It also enables you to add rounds or chamfers to the vertical workpiece edges. The process is the same as creating a rectangular or round workpiece. To create a custom automatic workpiece, you can use the Create Custom option in the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, and then Workpiece select the desired shape in the drop-down list below it. The default shape for a custom workpiece is BLOCK_XY_FLANGES, as shown in Figure 1. CREO精诚网 However, the following shapes are also available:

中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 6 | Page 11

• BLOCK_00_FLANGES

• BLOCK_00_TOP_FLANGE

• BLOCK_00_BOT_FLANGE

• BLOCK_CHAMF

• BLOCK_CHAMF_00_FLANGES

• BLOCK_CHAMF_00_TOP_ FLANGE

• CHAMF_CHAMF_00_BOT_ FLANGE

• BLOCK_CHAMF_00_BOT_ FLANGE

• BLOCK_ROUND

• BLOCK_ROUND_00_ FLANGES

• BLOCK_ROUND_00_TOP_ FLANGE

• BLOCK_ROUND_00_BOT_ FLANGE

• BAR_FLANGES

• BAR_TOP_FLANGE

• BAR_BOT_FLANGE Where 00 is the X, Y, or XY direction. You can use the offsets available for the rectangular and round automatic workpiece for a custom workpiece.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 6 | Page 12

© 2011 PTC

Creating and Assembling a Workpiece Manually You can create a part model inside or outside of Mold mode and designate it as the workpiece when assembling it into the mold model. • Use conventional part modeling techniques. • Assemble workpiece using conventional assembly constraints. • The accuracy of a manually created workpiece must be matched to the reference model. Figure 1 – Part Model

Figure 2 – Creating a Workpiece within the Mold Model

Figure 3 – Part Model Assembled as Workpiece

Creating a Workpiece Manually You can create a workpiece manually using either of the following methods: • Create the workpiece within the mold model by selecting Create Workpiece from the Workpiece types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group. The Component Create dialog box appears, and you must provide the name of the workpiece component as it displays in the model tree. • Create the workpiece outside the mold model as a conventional part model. When the part model is needed as the workpiece in the mold model you can assemble it as a component into the mold model and designate it as the workpiece. When creating the workpiece manually, you can use any of the conventional CREO精诚网 part modeling feature techniques available when creating a regular part model. For example, you can use Extrude features, Revolve features, Hole 中国CREO技术领航者 features, Sweep features, and Blend features. © 2011 PTC

Module 6 | Page 13

Assembling a Manually Created Workpiece If the workpiece is created in the mold model, it is already designated as the workpiece upon its creation. It must then be properly assembled into the mold model. If you create a part model outside of the mold and want to use it as the workpiece in a mold model, you must assemble it into the mold model and designate it as the workpiece. You can do this by selecting Assemble from the Workpiece types drop-down menu in the Reference Workpiece Model & Workpiece group. You can assemble the workpiece into the mold model using any of the available assembly constraints including Default Distance

, Angle Offset

, Parallel

, Coincident

, and Normal

,

.

Considerations when Creating and Assembling a Workpiece Manually Keep the following in mind when creating and assembling a workpiece manually: • If you manually create a workpiece and assemble it into the mold model, you need to match the workpiece accuracy to that of the reference model. • Keep the location of where the workpiece is split in mind. You can create a datum plane or coordinate system at this location to aid in the assembly process later.

Best Practices It is a best practice to create an automatic workpiece whenever possible. When an automatic workpiece is created, Creo Parametric automatically sets the accuracy of the workpiece model to that of the reference model. If a manual workpiece is created and assembled into the mold model, you must manually modify the workpiece accuracy so it matches the reference model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 6 | Page 14

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating and Assembling a Workpiece Manually Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Workpiece_Manual Task 1:

MANUAL_WRK.PRT

Assemble a workpiece created outside the mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Notice the part model and its datum planes. The accuracy has already been set to that of the reference model. 3. Click Close

.

4. Click Open CAP.ASM.

and double-click

5. Select Assemble Workpiece from the Workpiece types drop-down menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group. 6. In the Open dialog box, double-click MANUAL_WRK.PRT. 7. In the dashboard, select Default from the constraint drop-down list. • Click Complete Component . 8. Notice the component is now workpiece color. 9. Notice the workpiece symbol in the model tree. 10. Click Close

.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 6 | Page 15

Task 2:

Create and assemble a workpiece in the mold model.

1. Click Open

and double-click CAP_ROUND.ASM.

2. Select Create Workpiece menu.

from the Workpiece types drop-down

3. In the Component Create dialog box, type ROUND_WRK as the Name and click OK. 4. In the Creation Options dialog box, select Copy From Existing if necessary and click Browse. • Select Working Directory and double-click MMNS_PART_SOLID.PRT. • Click OK. 5. In the dashboard, select Default from the constraint drop-down list and click Complete Component . 6. In the model tree, right-click ROUND_WRK.PRT and select Activate. 7. Pre-highlight datum plane TOP and then select it. 8. Click Extrude Shapes group.

from the

9. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 10. Click Center and Point and sketch a circle, using the origin as the circle center. 11. Middle-click and edit the diameter to 80. 12. Click OK

.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 6 | Page 16

© 2011 PTC

13. Edit the depth to 45. 14. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. • Select Blind as the Side 2 depth and type 15 as the depth. • Click Complete Feature .

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 6 | Page 17

Reclassifying and Removing Mold Model Components Reclassifying mold components is a great way to switch which component is used as the workpiece. • Each component type can be reclassified to any other type: – Workpiece – Mold Base Component – Mold Component • You cannot reclassify the reference model.

Figure 1 – Mold Model Before Reclassification

Figure 2 – Mold Base Component Reclassified to a Workpiece

Figure 3 – Mold Model After Reclassification

Reclassifying Mold Model Components You can switch the classification of components within the mold model. Reclassifying mold components is a great way to switch which component is used as the workpiece. Each of the following component types can be reclassified to any of the other types: • Workpiece — The mold model uses the selected component as a workpiece. In Figure 3, the round workpiece has been reclassified as a mold base component. • Mold Base Component — The mold model uses the selected component as a mold base component. In Figure 2, the rectangular mold base component has been reclassified as a workpiece. CREO精诚网 • 中国CREO技术领航者 Mold Component — The mold model uses the selected component as a mold component. Module 6 | Page 18

© 2011 PTC

The following are some points to keep in mind when reclassifying mold model components: • You cannot reclassify the reference model. • You cannot reclassify a different model to become a reference model. • The mold model can contain multiple workpieces. In Figure 2, a mold base component has been reclassified as a workpiece, causing there to be two workpieces in the mold model.

Removing Mold Model Components You can remove components from the mold model in any of the following ways: • Select the component, right-click, and select Delete. • Select the component, and press DELETE. • Select the component and select Delete drop-down menu in the Operation group.

from the Delete types

The Undo and Redo operations are not available if you remove components from the mold model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 6 | Page 19

PROCEDURE - Reclassifying and Removing Mold Model Components Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Reclassify Task 1:

RECLASSIFY.ASM

Reclassify mold model components.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Notice the round workpiece in the mold model. 3. Notice also the rectangular mold base component.

4. Click Classify Modifiers group.

from the

5. Select MANUAL_WRK.PRT and click OK from the Select dialog box. 6. Click Workpiece > Done from the menu manager. 7. Notice that there are now two workpieces in the mold model.

8. Select ROUND_WRK.PRT and click OK from the Select dialog box. 9. Click Mld Base Cmp > Done from the menu manager. 10. Click OK from the Select dialog box. 11. Notice that there is now only one workpiece in the mold model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 6 | Page 20

© 2011 PTC

Task 2:

Remove a mold model component.

1. Select ROUND_WRK.PRT, right-click, and select Delete. 2. Click OK from the Delete dialog box. 3. Notice the mold base component is removed from the mold model.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 6 | Page 21

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 6 | Page 22

© 2011 PTC

Module

7

Mold Volume Creation Module Overview Once the reference model and workpiece have been assembled into the mold model you must create mold volumes within the mold model. Mold volumes are surfaces that locate a closed volume of space in the workpiece, and are ultimately used to create the final mold core, cavity, and slider components. In this module, you learn which mold volumes are in a mold model and how to create them.

Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to: • Understand basic surfacing terms. • Understand what mold volumes are. • Sketch mold volumes. • Create sliders using boundary quilts. • Sketch sliders. • Create a reference part cutout. • Sketch lifter and insert mold volumes. • Replace surfaces and trim to geometry.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 1

Surfacing Terms Surface modeling terms are important to understand because they are used throughout this course. • Surfaces – Quilt – Surface Patch – Solid Surface – Datum Planes • Edges – Surface edge ♦ One-sided ♦ Two-sided – Solid edge

Figure 1 – Viewing a Surface

Figure 2 – Surface Quilt

Figure 3 – Solid Surface and Edge

Figure 4 – Surface Edge

Surfacing Terms Surface modeling terms are used throughout this course. Therefore, they are important to understand. • Surface – Surfaces are infinitely thin, non-solid features used to aid in the design of highly complex and irregular shapes. Notice that surfaces are shown using orange and purple highlighting on the edges when viewed in wireframe display, as in Figure 1. – Orange denotes outer or one-sided edges. – Purple denotes inner or two-sided edges, since they border two surface patches. In Creo Parametric, the term surface can be used for any of the following:

CREO精诚网 • Quilts – A quilt may consist of a single surface or a collection of surfaces. A quilt represents a patchwork of connected surfaces. A multi-surface 中国CREO技术领航者 quilt contains information describing the geometry of all the surfaces Module 7 | Page 2

© 2011 PTC

• • • •

that compose it, and information on how these surfaces are joined or intersected, such as the models shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2. Surface Patch – If you create a surface feature, which is made of several segments, the surface is created with multiple patches, as in Figure 1. Solid Surfaces – A face of a solid feature, such as the solid model shown in Figure 3. Datum Planes – A planar datum feature that extends infinitely but is represented by a rectangular border. Edge – An edge is the boundary of a solid, as in Figure 3 or a surface, as in Figure 4. Surface edges can be one-sided or two-sided depending on the presence of adjacent surface geometry.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 3

Understanding Mold Volumes A mold volume consists of surfaces that locate a closed volume of space within the workpiece. • Mold volumes: – Have no solid material. – Are ultimately used to create solid mold components. – Are assembly-level features. • As a best practice you should rename mold volumes. • You can apply finishing features such as rounds and drafts. Figure 1 – Model Tree of Mold Model

Figure 2 – Mold Volumes Shaded

Figure 3 – Mold Volumes No Hidden

Understanding Mold Volumes A mold volume consists of surfaces that locate a closed volume of space within the workpiece. Because the mold volume is comprised of surfaces, it has no solid material. Creating mold volumes is an intermediate step to creating the final extracted mold components. Mold volumes are ultimately used to create the final solid extracted mold components. Figure 2 shows three different mold volumes. Because the mold volumes are surfaces, they appear magenta when the model display is set to something other than shading, as shown in Figure 3. The following is some general information regarding mold volume creation: • A mold volume can add or remove material. • A mold volume is created as an assembly level protrusion or cut within the mold model. CREO精诚网 • 中国CREO技术领航者 You can sketch mold volumes. • A mold volume can be trimmed or split using other surfaces. Module 7 | Page 4

© 2011 PTC

• Mold volume creation is an iterative process. You can create mold volumes at any time after the workpiece is assembled but before the final solid mold components are extracted. A mold volume displays in the model tree with a different icon than that of the reference model and workpiece, as shown in Figure 1. Because mold volumes are created within the workpiece, it is beneficial to create a style state that sets the workpiece to wireframe when creating mold volumes. This enables you to more clearly see inside the workpiece, yet it still makes the workpiece and its surfaces available if they need to be selected as references. The workpiece in the figures is set to wireframe.

Renaming Mold Volumes When you create a mold volume, it is a best practice to rename it to something that helps you recognize it within the model tree. To rename a mold volume, you can click Properties from the Controls group after starting the mold volume creation tool. You can also right-click in the graphics window and select Properties. This causes the Properties dialog box to appear, which enables you to edit the mold volume name. In Figure 1, notice that the mold volumes have been renamed.

Applying Finishing Features You can add draft and round features to a mold volume in the same manner in which you add to any other solid part. This enables you to customize the mold volume. It is used to create the solid mold component.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 5

Sketching Mold Volumes You can create a mold volume by sketching its shape. • Sketch-based feature tools include: – Extrude – Revolve – Sweep – Blend – Swept Blend – Use Quilt

Figure 2 – Mold Model with No Mold Volumes

Figure 1 – Sketching a Mold Volume

Figure 3 – Mold Model with Mold Volume

Sketching Mold Volumes You can create a mold volume by sketching its shape. Consider the following guidelines when sketching mold volumes: • The mold volume is a set of surfaces. • You can use most sketch-based features within Mold mode to create a mold volume. Feature tools you can use include: — Extrudes a sketch section to a specified depth in the – Extrude direction normal to the sketching plane. – Revolve — Revolves a sketched section by a specific angle around an axis of rotation. – Sweep — Sweeps a sketched section along a specific trajectory. Create constant section sweeps or variable section sweeps. – Blend tool — Creates a straight or smooth blended volume by connecting several sketched sections. – Swept Blend — Sweeps a blend section along a specified CREO精诚网 trajectory. 中国CREO技术领航者 – Use Quilt — Creates a volume by referencing a surface or quilt. Module 7 | Page 6

© 2011 PTC

• Depending on the tool used and the desired mold volume, it can be beneficial to use the workpiece surfaces as sketching planes for the mold volumes. • The sketch must be closed.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Sketching Mold Volumes Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Volume_Sketch Task 1:

SKETCH-VOLUME.ASM

Sketch a mold volume in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. From the model tree, select SKETCH-VOLUME_WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. from the 6. Select Mold Volume Mold Volume types drop-down menu in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group. 7. Click Properties Controls group.

from the

8. In the Properties dialog box, edit the Name to PLUG_VOL and press ENTER. 9. Click Revolve Shapes group.

from the

10. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. 11. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT from the model tree as the Sketch Plane. 12. Select Top from the Orientation drop-down list and click Sketch. 13. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar.

from the

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 8

© 2011 PTC

14. Enable only the following .

Sketcher Display types:

15. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden Line from the Display Style types drop-down menu. 16. Click References Setup group.

from the

17. Zoom in and select the top workpiece surface, datum axis A_1, the bottom of the plug, and the angled edge. 18. Click Close from the References dialog box. 19. Click Centerline Datum group.

from the

20. Sketch a vertical centerline on the axis reference. 21. Click Line Chain from the Sketching group and sketch the five lines shown. 22. Click OK

.

23. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation. 24. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. 25. Click OK group.

from

from the Controls

26. De-select all geometry. from the 27. Select No Hidden Display Style types drop-down menu and disable Axis Display . 28. Notice that the sketched mold volume is a surface.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 9

29. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 10

© 2011 PTC

Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts The system can calculate undercut areas in the reference model and create boundary quilts to be used for automatic slider creation. • A slider is a special type of mold volume. • Boundary quilts are created in undercut areas. • Slider mold volume is created from the boundary quilt. • Slider mold volume can be projected to a specified plane.

Figure 1 – Meshing a Boundary Quilt

Figure 2 – Slider Mold Volume

Figure 3 – Slider Mold Volume Projected to Workpiece Surface

What is a Slider? A slider is a mold component that helps account for undercuts in the reference model geometry. Undercuts are features in the reference model that would prevent a conventional core-and-cavity mold from opening after the molded part has solidified. Sliders “slide” in from the sides to account for these undercuts to keep the mold from locking when opening and closing, or destroying the part. The action of these sliders is called side action.

Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts In Creo Parametric, a slider is a special type of mold volume that can be used to ultimately create the slider mold component. One of the ways you can create sliders in Creo Parametric is by using boundary quilts. To create a CREO精诚网 slider mold volume using boundary quilts, you must select Mold Volume 中国CREO技术领航者 from the Mold Volume types drop-down menu in the Parting Surface & Mold © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 11

Volume group and then click Slider from the Volume Tools group. This launches the Slider Volume dialog box. The Slider Volume dialog box displays the reference part found in the mold model. If the mold model contains more than one reference model, you must specify which one is to be used for the calculation. You can also specify the pull direction. The system utilizes the mold model's pull direction as the default Pull Direction, but you can specify a different pull direction by selecting any of the following references: • Plane — Makes the pull direction perpendicular to the specified plane. • Curve, Edge, or Axis — Makes the pull direction follow the selected curve, edge, or axis. • Coordinate System — Makes the pull direction follow the specified axis of the selected coordinate system. Once the pull direction has been defined, you can click Calculate Undercut from the Slider Volume dialog box. This causes the system to Boundaries perform a geometry check for undercut areas in the reference model. The system performs the check by shining a light on the reference model in the pull direction. The areas where light does not reach are the undercuts, which are also known as black volumes. These areas would cause the mold to lock on opening or closing. Therefore, a slider is required in these areas. The system creates boundary quilts in the areas where the undercuts occur and displays them in the Exclude column of the Slider Volume dialog box. You can select each boundary quilt and perform the following operations on each quilt: • Mesh — Meshes the boundary surface in the graphics window. In Figure 1, the boundary surface is meshed. • Shade — Shades only the boundary surface in the graphics window, temporarily hiding all other geometry. You can then add each quilt that you want to become a slider mold volume to the Include column of the Slider Volume dialog box. The system automatically extrudes the slider mold volume based on the boundary quilt. A completed slider mold volume is shown in Figure 2.

Specifying the Projection Plane Optionally, you can specify a projection plane for each slider mold volume. The system extends the extruded slider volume up to the specified projection plane, in the direction normal to the plane. In Figure 3, the right surface of the workpiece was specified as the projection plane. The resulting slider mold volume is projected up to this surface.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 12

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Slider_Boundary Task 1:

SLIDER-CALC.ASM

Create a slider mold volume using boundary quilts in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. From the model tree, select SLIDER-CALC_WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Click Mold Volume from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group. 7. Click Properties Controls group.

from the

8. In the Properties dialog box, edit the Name to CORNER_SLIDER and press ENTER. 9. Click Slider Tools group.

from the Volume

10. In the Slider Volume dialog box, click Calculate Undercut Boundaries . • Notice that one undercut area was found in the reference model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 13

11. In the Slider Volume dialog box, select Quilt 1 and click Mesh Selected Boundary Surfaces . 12. Notice that the quilt is meshed in the graphics window.

13. In the Slider Volume dialog box, click Shade Selected Boundary . Surfaces 14. Click OK from the Shade Info dialog box.

15. In the Slider Volume dialog box, click Include Boundary Surfaces to include the quilt. • Click OK . 16. Click OK group.

from the Controls

17. Notice the slider mold volume that was created.

18. With the slider mold volume still selected, right-click and select Edit Definition. 19. In the Slider Volume dialog box, click Select Projection Plane . 20. Select the right surface of the workpiece.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 14

© 2011 PTC

21. Click OK from the Slider Volume dialog box. 22. Notice that the slider mold volume has extruded out to the selected surface.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 15

Sketching Slider Mold Volumes You can sketch slider mold volumes as an alternative to calculating undercut boundaries. • Reasons to sketch slider mold volumes: – Shape – Size – Result • Sketching guidelines: – Calculate undercut boundaries for reference. – Ensure your sketched slider accounts for the entire undercut geometry. – The sketch must be closed.

Figure 2 – Sketched Slider Mold Volumes

Figure 1 – Undesired Slider Result

Figure 3 – Slider Volume too Small

Sketching Slider Mold Volumes You can also sketch slider mold volumes. The following are reasons to sketch slider mold volumes: • Shape — When calculated undercut boundaries are used, the resulting slider mold volume takes on the shape of the undercut geometry. If the shape is not desired for manufacturing, or it cannot be manufactured, a slider mold volume can be sketched to account for the undercut geometry. In Figure 1, the shape created by calculating undercut boundaries is not as conducive to manufacturing as the sketched slider mold volume in Figure 2. • Size — Since the slider mold volume created by calculating undercut boundaries takes on the shape of the undercut, the slider mold volume may be too small for manufacturing, as shown in Figure 3. Consequently, you can sketch a larger slider mold volume that accounts for the undercut, as shown in Figure 2. CREO精诚网 • Result — Depending on the reference model geometry, sometimes the slider mold volume obtained by calculating undercut boundaries cannot be 中国CREO技术领航者 created, or the slider mold volume does not entirely account for undercut Module 7 | Page 16

© 2011 PTC

geometry. In Figure 1, the slider does not properly account for the round feature, and thus a sketched mold volume was created in Figure 2.

Guidelines for Sketching Sliders When creating slider mold volumes using sketch-based features, consider the following guidelines: • You can still initially calculate the undercut boundaries for the reference model even when you are sketching the slider mold volumes. The analysis helps you determine the locations in the mold model where sliders will be required and helps ensure that you have accounted for all undercut geometry. • Ensure that the sketch you create accounts for the entire undercut geometry. That is, make sure that the entire undercut geometry is contained within the resulting sketched slider mold volume. It can be beneficial to utilize the sides of the undercut geometry as sketching references. • Because the slider is just a special type of mold volume, you can use any sketch-based feature that is available for sketching the conventional mold volume on the slider mold volume. • Because the slider is a mold volume, the sketch must be closed.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Sketching Slider Mold Volumes Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Slider_Sketch Task 1:

SLIDER-SKETCH.ASM

Sketch a slider mold volume in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. From the model tree, select SLIDER-SKETCH_WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe 5. The left slider volume, created by calculating undercut boundaries, is too small to be manufactured, so you must sketch a different slider mold volume. 6. Select the Mold tab. 7. From the model tree, select the LEFT_SLIDER_VOL, right-click, and select Suppress. • Click OK and de-select all geometry. 8. Click Mold Volume group.

from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume

9. Right-click and select Properties. • Type LOWER_SLIDER_VOL as the Name and press ENTER. 10. Click Extrude Shapes group.

from the

11. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. 12. Select the front workpiece surface as the Sketch Plane. 13. Select Bottom from the Orientation drop-down list and CREO精诚网 click Sketch.

中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 18

© 2011 PTC

14. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 15. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar. 16. Click References Setup group.

from the from the

17. Select datum planes MOLD_ RIGHT, MAIN_PARTING_PLN, and the left and right edges of the tab, zooming in if necessary. 18. Click Close from the References dialog box. 19. Sketch, constrain, and dimension the following sketch. 20. Click OK

.

21. Spin the model slightly and click . Change Depth Direction 22. In the graphics window, right-click the depth handle and select To Selected. 23. Right-click to query and select the inner reference model surface.

24. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. 25. Click OK group.

from

from the Controls

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 19

Task 2:

Sketch a second slider mold volume.

1. Spin the model if necessary and zoom in on the right slider volume. 2. The right slider volume, created by calculating undercut boundaries, has not completely accounted for the undercut created by the round. 3. Select the RIGHT_SLIDER_ VOL, right-click, and select Suppress. • Click OK and de-select all geometry. 4. Click Mold Volume

.

from the Controls group. 5. Click Properties • Type UPPER_SLIDER_VOL as the Name and press ENTER. 6. Click Extrude

.

7. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. 8. Select the right workpiece surface as the Sketch Plane. 9. Select Bottom from the Orientation drop-down list and click Sketch.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 20

© 2011 PTC

10. Click Sketch View 11. Click References

. .

12. Select datum planes MOLD_FRONT and MAIN_PARTING_PLN as references. 13. Click Close from the References dialog box. 14. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu and sketch, constrain, and dimension the following sketch. 15. Click OK

.

16. Spin the model slightly and click . Change Depth Direction 17. In the graphics window, right-click the depth handle and select To Selected. 18. Right-click to query and select the inner reference model surface. 19. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. 20. Click OK group.

from

from the Controls

21. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 21

Creating a Reference Part Cutout A reference part cutout enables you to remove any overlapping reference model geometry from the mold volume. • The reference model volume is subtracted from the mold volume. • The resulting mold volume geometry matches the mating reference model geometry. • Helps you verify that you have created the desired mold volume. • Not a required step.

Figure 1 – Reference Model

Figure 2 – Mold Volume Created

Figure 3 – Reference Part Cutout Created

Creating a Reference Part Cutout You can create a reference part cutout on a mold volume by selecting Reference Part Cutout from the Trim to Geometry types drop-down menu in the Volume Tools group. A reference part cutout enables you to remove any overlapping reference model geometry from the mold volume. The volume of the reference model is subtracted from the mold volume. This is a very useful feature because the mold volume will then match the reference model geometry. A reference part cutout enables you to create a mold volume that completely encompasses the desired area of the reference model and then create a reference part cutout feature. Creating a reference part cutout is not a requirement when creating mold volumes. The reference model geometry is automatically cut out of the mold CREO精诚网 volumes when the volumes are split (this happens later in the process). Creating a reference part cutout is a great method to help you determine if 中国CREO技术领航者 the reference geometry can successfully be cut out during the split process. Module 7 | Page 22

© 2011 PTC

It can also help you visually see whether or not you have created a mold volume that captures the desired reference model geometry. The reference part cutout option is only available if you are creating a volume or if you are redefining the volume. The resulting reference part cutout feature appears in the model tree as a feature called Refpart Cutout id. However, the mold volume for which the trim was applied is also displayed in the model tree as shown in Figure 4:

Figure 4 – Reference Part Cutout in Model Tree

Reference Part Cutout Tips Consider the following tips when creating a reference part cutout for a mold volume: • Without creating additional modifications to the volume after the reference part cutout, the system makes the reference part cutout option unavailable. Therefore, you cannot cut out a volume twice. • When more than one reference part is present, the system prompts you to select one.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 23

PROCEDURE - Creating a Reference Part Cutout Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Reference-Part_Cutout Task 1:

REFPART-CUTOUT.ASM

Create reference part cutouts in mold volumes in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select REFPART-CUTOUT_ WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice the rectangular hole in the bottom surface. 7. In the model tree, right-click mold volume UPPER_SLIDER_VOL and select Unhide. 8. Notice that the mold volume completely consumes the rectangular cut, but it also occupies volume in the reference model. 9. Notice that the surface of the mold volume is flat. 10. Select mold volume UPPER_SLIDER_VOL, right-click, and select Redefine Mold Volume. 11. Select Reference Part Cutout from the Trim To Geometry types drop-down menu in the Volume Tools group. 12. Click OK group.

from the Controls

13. Notice the Refpart Cutout feature in the model tree.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 24

© 2011 PTC

14. Select reference model REFPART-CUTOUT_REF.PRT, right-click, and select Hide. 15. Notice that the reference model volume has been subtracted from the mold volume. 16. Right-click REFPART-CUTOUT_ REF.PRT and select Unhide. 17. Pan the model to the right to inspect the LOWER_SLIDER_VOL2 mold volume. 18. Again, notice that the mold volume completely consumes the tab, and also occupies volume in the reference model. 19. Again, notice that the surface of the mold volume is flat. 20. In the model tree, right-click LOWER_SLIDER_VOL2 and select Redefine Mold Volume. 21. Click Reference Part Cutout . 22. Click OK

.

23. Notice the Refpart Cutout feature in the model tree. 24. Notice that the reference model volume has been subtracted from the mold volume.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 25

25. Pan the model to the left to inspect LOWER_SLIDER_VOL1. 26. In the model tree, right-click LOWER_SLIDER_VOL1 and select Redefine Mold Volume. 27. Click Reference Part Cutout . 28. Click OK

.

29. Notice the Refpart Cutout feature in the model tree. 30. Spin the model and notice that the reference model volume has been subtracted from the mold volume. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 26

© 2011 PTC

Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes A lifter is another mold component that helps account for undercuts of the inside of the reference model geometry. • Lifters usually move at an angle. • Lifters are usually long and narrow.

Figure 1 – Viewing the Undercut

Figure 2 – Lifter Created to Account for Undercut

Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes A lifter is another mold component that helps account for undercuts of the inside of the reference model geometry. Because mold components are ultimately created from mold volumes, you can use sketch-based features to create lifter mold volumes in the mold model. A lifter is usually attached to the moving side of the mold. It moves at an angle to free the plastic that comprises the undercut inside the model. Due to their function, lifters are normally long and narrow.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 27

PROCEDURE - Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Volume_Lifter Task 1:

LIFTER.ASM

Sketch lifter mold volumes in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Select LIFTER_WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice the undercut created by the tab. from the 7. Select Mold Volume Mold Volume types drop-down menu in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group. 8. Click Properties Controls group.

from the

9. Edit the mold volume name to LIFTER_VOL1 and press ENTER. 10. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT as the Sketch Plane. 11. Click Extrude Shapes group.

from the

12. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar.

from the

13. Select Hidden Line from the Display Style types drop-down menu.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 28

© 2011 PTC

14. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . from 15. Click References the Setup group and select the bottom of the workpiece and the tab vertex as references. • Click Close.

16. Click Centerline and sketch a vertical and horizontal centerline through the vertex reference.

17. Select No Hidden from the Display Style types drop-down menu. 18. Disable Plane Display

.

19. Sketch, constrain, and dimension the sketch, as shown. 20. Click OK

.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 29

21. In the dashboard, edit the depth to Both Sides . • Edit the depth to 8 and click Complete Feature . 22. Select the View tab. from the 23. Select Shading Display Style types drop-down menu. 24. Orient to the 3D view orientation. 25. Select the Edit Mold Volume tab. 26. Select Reference Part Cutout from the Trim to Geometry types drop-down menu in the Volume Tools group. 27. Click OK

.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 30

© 2011 PTC

Replacing Surfaces and Trimming to Geometry You can edit mold volumes by replacing surfaces and trimming them to other geometry. • Replacing surfaces can: – Add volume. – Remove volume. – Add and remove volume simultaneously. • Trimming to geometry trims a volume to a specified reference. – Specify the direction to be removed.

Figure 2 – Mold Volume Before Surface Replace

Figure 1 – Trimming a Volume to Geometry

Figure 3 – Mold Volume After Surface Replace

Replacing Surfaces You can replace a single mold volume surface with a quilt surface by clicking the Editing group drop-down menu and selecting Replace . You can use the Replace option to add volume, remove volume, or add and remove volume simultaneously. In Figures 2 and 3, the bottom mold volume surface was replaced with the surface quilt. By default, the mold volume is “consumed” by the replaced surface feature. That is, the mold volume is not visible, but still exists previously in the model tree. When using the Replace option, there is one option available in the Replaced Surface dialog box: • Keep quilt — Enables the quilt selected for the replace to remain visible after the replace is created. In Figure 3, the quilt was not kept after the surface replace was created.

CREO精诚网 The Replace option is only available if you are creating a volume or if you are redefining the volume. The resulting replaced surface feature appears in the 中国CREO技术领航者 model tree as a feature called Replaced Surface id. © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 31

Trimming to Geometry You can trim surfaces to other geometry in the mold model by selecting Trim from the Trim To Geometry types drop-down menu in the to Geometry Volume Tools group. The Trim to Geometry option is only available if you are creating a volume or if you are redefining the volume. The resulting trim to geometry feature appears in the model tree as a feature called Trim To Geom id. However, the mold volume for which the trim was applied is also displayed in the model tree. You can trim to geometry as an alternative to extracting a mold volume up to a surface. However, trimming to geometry has more powerful capabilities than just this use. Trimming can only remove volume, not add it. When trimming surfaces to geometry, you must specify the following: • Ref Type – Specifies what the system uses as the trimming entity. You can specify one of the following: – Part – Uses a part for trimming. – Quilt – Uses a quilt for trimming. – Plane – Uses a plane surface or datum plane for trimming. • Reference – Enables you to specify the item whose geometry will be used for trimming. The item that you can select depends on the Ref Type that was specified. Essentially, the Ref Type acts like a filter for the Reference selection. • Direction – Enables you to select a trim feature direction. A direction arrow points in the direction that volume will be trimmed at the reference. You can select the following references: – Plane – Makes the direction perpendicular to the specified plane. – Curve, Edge, or Axis – Makes the direction follow the selected curve, edge, or axis. – Coordinate System – Makes the direction follow the specified axis of the selected coordinate system. • Trim Type – Enables you to specify which side of the trimming reference will be used when trimming the mold volume. You can select either of the following: – Trim By First Reference surface.

– Trims the item by the first reference

– Trim By Last Reference – Trims the item by the last reference surface. • Offset – Offsets the trimming reference in the direction currently specified before trimming the geometry.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 32

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Replacing Surfaces and Trimming to Geometry Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Replace_Trim Task 1:

REPLACE-TRIM.ASM

Trim a slider mold volume to existing geometry.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select REPLACE-TRIM_WRK. PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Spin the model as shown and notice that the slider mold volume passes through the reference model. 7. In the model tree, select SLIDER_VOL1, right-click, and select Redefine Mold Volume. 8. Select Trim to Geometry from the Trim to Geometry types drop-down menu in the Volume Tools group. 9. In the Trim To Geom dialog box, select Quilt as the Ref Type. 10. Select the previously created quilt as the trimming entity. 11. Select datum plane MOLD_FRONT from the model tree as the Direction. 12. Click Flip from the menu manager until the arrow points to the left. The volume to the left of the trimming entity is to be removed.

CREO精诚网 13. Click Okay from the menu 中国CREO技术领航者 manager. © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 33

14. Click Apply Changes from the Trim To Geom dialog box. 15. Notice that the slider mold volume has been trimmed at the trimming reference.

Task 2:

Replace a mold volume surface with a surface quilt.

1. In the model tree, right-click Skirt Surface id 3055 and select Unhide. 2. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 3. Orient to the RIGHT view orientation. 4. Select the Edit Mold Volume tab. 5. Notice that there is a space between the bottom of the slider mold volume and the surface. 6. Click the Editing group drop-down menu and select Replace

.

7. Select the View tab. 8. Orient to the 3D view orientation. 9. Query-select the bottom surface of the slider mold volume.

10. Select the large surface quilt. 11. In the Replaced Surface dialog box, select Keep quilt and click Define. 12. Click Yes > Done from the menu manager and click Preview.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 34

© 2011 PTC

13. In the Replaced Surface dialog box, select Keep quilt and click Define. 14. Click No > Done from the menu manager and click OK. 15. Select the Edit Mold Volume tab. 16. Click OK

.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 35

Sketching Insert Mold Volumes You can swap inserts out of the same core and cavity in the mold model to produce similarly shaped parts. • Inserts are used as a cost saving measure. • Inserts are used as a consideration for machining.

Figure 1 – Viewing the Reference Model

Figure 2 – Viewing the Completed Insert

Figure 3 – Design Variations that Can Use Same Core and Cavity

Sketching Insert Mold Volumes An insert is another mold component that is typically used as a cost saving measure. The mold uses the same core and cavity, but one insert is swapped for another. Different inserts can be used to create different shapes. Thus, you can use the same mold to create similar parts simply by switching inserts. In Figure 1, an insert needs to be created for a square cut in the bottom inset of the reference model. The resulting insert mold volume is shown in Figure 2. However, the model could have a design variation where, rather than a square cut in the bottom, there is a round cut in the bottom, as shown in Figure 3. In this case, you can create a different insert mold volume, while you use the same core and cavity. You can also use inserts in areas that are difficult to machine. Because mold components are ultimately created from mold volumes, you can use sketch-based features to create insert mold volumes in the mold model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 36

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Sketching Insert Mold Volumes Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Volume_Insert Task 1:

INSERT.ASM

Create an insert mold volume in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select INSERT_WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice the square shape cut into the top of the model. 7. Notice that the INSERT_VOL mold volume has been started and is partially filling the square shape. 8. Right-click INSERT_VOL and select Redefine Mold Volume. 9. Press ALT, query-select the top of the existing mold volume, and click Extrude Shapes group.

from the

10. Click Project from the Sketching group and select Loop from the Type dialog box. 11. Query-select the main top surface of the reference model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 37

12. In the menu manager, click Next until the square loop is highlighted and click Accept. 13. Click Close from the Type dialog box. 14. Click OK

.

15. Edit the depth to 20 and click Complete Feature .

16. In the model tree, right-click Surface id 1753 and select Unhide. 17. Click the Editing group drop-down menu and select Replace

.

18. Query-select the bottom of the large, square, extruded volume. 19. In the graphics window, select Quilt:F14. 20. Click OK from the Replaced Surface dialog box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 38

© 2011 PTC

21. In the model tree, right-click Surface id 2746 and select Unhide. 22. Click in the background to de-select all geometry. 23. Click the Editing group drop-down menu and select Replace

.

24. Spin the model and select the top of the large, square, extruded volume. 25. In the graphics window, select Quilt:F15. 26. Click OK from the Replaced Surface dialog box. 27. Select INSERT_REF.PRT, right-click, and select Hide. 28. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 29. Select Reference Part Cutout from the Trim to Geometry types drop-down menu in the Volume Tools group.

30. Select Trim to Geometry from the Trim To Geometry types drop-down menu. 31. In the Trim To Geom dialog box, select Quilt as the Ref Type. 32. Select LIFTER_VOL2 as the Reference. 33. Select datum plane MOLD_FRONT as the direction and click Okay from the menu manager. 34. Click Apply Changes from the Trim To Geom dialog box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 7 | Page 39

35. Click OK

.

36. In the model tree, right-click LIFTER_VOL2 and select Hide. 37. Spin the model and view the completed insert mold volume.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 7 | Page 40

© 2011 PTC

Module

8

Parting Line and Parting Surface Creation Module Overview A parting surface is a surface feature that you can use to split a workpiece or an existing volume, including surfaces of one or more reference parts. You can create parting surfaces manually by using various basic and advanced surface creation techniques. You can also create parting surfaces automatically by using the skirt surface technique. The skirt surface technique requires parting lines that you can define by creating silhouette curves. In this module, you learn how to create silhouette curves, as well as how to create parting surfaces both automatically and manually.

Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to: • Understand parting lines and parting surfaces. • Create an automatic parting line using silhouette curves. • Analyze silhouette curve options including slides and loop selection. • Create a skirt surface. • Analyze skirt surface options including extend curves, tangent conditions, extension directions, and shutoff extension. • Analyze surface editing and manipulation tools. • Merge surfaces. • Create saddle shutoff surfaces. • Create a parting surface manually.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 1

Understanding Parting Lines and Parting Surfaces You can create parting lines and parting surfaces to define where mold volumes are to be split. • Parting surface creation methods: – Automatic — Skirt Surface tool – Manual — Use surfacing techniques • Parting line creation methods: – Automatic — Silhouette Curve tool – Manual — Use datum curve techniques – Only needed for automatic parting surface creation.

Figure 2 – Parting Surface Created Automatically

Figure 1 – Automatic Parting Line Created

Figure 3 – Parting Surface Created Manually

Understanding Parting Lines and Parting Surfaces Once the reference model and workpiece are assembled into the mold model, it is necessary to begin thinking about where the workpiece will split into the core and cavity to open the mold. The location where the workpiece splits is the parting surface. The parting surface is generally perpendicular to the pull direction and lies between the parting line edges of the reference model and the outside walls of the workpiece. There are two different methods that you can use to create the parting surface: • Automatic — You can utilize the Skirt Surface tool to create the parting surface for you automatically. • Manual — You create the parting surface using basic and advanced surface creation techniques. CREO精诚网 If 中国CREO技术领航者 you create the parting surface automatically using the skirt surface, it is necessary to first create a parting line. The parting line is a collection of Module 8 | Page 2

© 2011 PTC

datum curves that is created on the reference model. You can then use the parting line to create the skirt surface. There are two different methods that you can use to create the parting line: tool to create • Automatic — You can utilize the Silhouette Curve the parting line for you automatically. A silhouette curve is a datum curve feature that is created where the draft on the reference model instantaneously changes from positive to negative when viewed from a certain point. • Manual — You create datum curves using various techniques in order to create the parting line. You only need to create a parting line if you will be using the Skirt Surface tool to create the parting surface.

Parting Surface Criteria You must remember the following criteria when creating parting surfaces: • A parting surface must intersect the workpiece or mold volume completely. You can merge multiple surfaces together. • A parting surface cannot intersect itself. • You can use any surface as a parting surface as long as the first two criteria are met. • Parting surface features are created at the assembly level in the mold model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 3

Creating an Automatic Parting Line using Silhouette Curves A silhouette curve is created where the draft on the reference model instantaneously changes from positive to negative when viewed from the pull direction. • The automatic parting line is created using silhouette curves. • You must define the following: – Name – Surface references – Direction

Figure 1 – Mold Model

Figure 2 – Silhouette Curve Parting Line

Figure 3 – Silhouette Curve Parting Line

Creating an Automatic Parting Line using Silhouette Curves You can create an automatic parting line using the Silhouette Curve tool. This tool creates the parting line by using silhouette curves. A silhouette curve is a datum curve feature that is created where the draft on the reference model instantaneously changes from positive to negative when viewed from a certain direction. Figure 3 shows the resulting parting line from the mold model in Figure 1. From the mold model standpoint, you must define the following when creating the silhouette curve: • Name — Defines the name of the curve as it displays in the model tree. If desired, you can accept the default name. CREO精诚网 • Surface Refs — Specifies the surfaces on which to create the silhouette curve. By default, the reference model is defined as the surface references. 中国CREO技术领航者 Thus, the silhouette curve is created on the reference model. If the mold Module 8 | Page 4

© 2011 PTC

model contains more than one reference model, you must specify the surface references to be used, and the surface references must all be selected on the same solid, or reference model. • Direction — Defines the direction for creating the silhouette curve. By default, the specified direction is the pull direction, although you can specify a different direction using any of the following options: – Plane — Makes the direction perpendicular to the specified plane. – Curve, Edge, or Axis — Makes the direction follow the selected curve, edge, or axis. – Coordinate System — Makes the direction follow the specified axis of the selected coordinate system. In Figure 2, notice that the silhouette curve is created at all draft transitions from the pull direction.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 5

PROCEDURE - Creating an Automatic Parting Line using Silhouette Curves Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Parting-Line_Automatic Task 1:

AUTO-PART-LINE.ASM

Create an automatic parting line in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select the AUTO-PART-LINE_ WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice that the reference model contains a hole in its top surface. 7. Click Silhouette Curve from the Design Features group. 8. Click OK from the Silhouette Curve dialog box.

9. Select the AUTO-PART-LINE_ REF.PRT, right-click, and select Hide. 10. Spin the model, and notice that the silhouette curve is comprised of two loops. 11. Click Close

.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 6

© 2011 PTC

Task 2:

Create an automatic parting line in a mold model.

1. Click Open and double-click COVER-PART-LINE.ASM. 2. Select the COVER-PART-LINE_ WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice that the reference model contains four circular holes and one rectangular hole. 7. Click Silhouette Curve

.

8. Click OK from the Silhouette Curve dialog box.

9. Zoom in on the top of the model and notice that there is a curve around each hole in the top surface.

10. Orient to the 3D view orientation. 11. Notice that there is another curve around the entire bottom edge of the reference model. 12. Notice that there is only one silhouette curve feature created in the model tree.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 7

13. Orient to the FRONT view orientation. from the 14. Select Hidden Line Display Style types drop-down menu. 15. Notice that there is a curve created at every location where the draft instantaneously changes from positive to negative. from the 16. Select Shading Display Style types drop-down menu. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 8

© 2011 PTC

Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Slides The Slides option enables you to specify mold volumes that already account for undercut geometry zones in the reference model. • The system excludes silhouette curve creation at slides.

Figure 1 – Mold Model and Slider Mold Volumes

Figure 2 – Silhouette Curve without Slides Specified

Figure 3 – Silhouette Curve with Slides Specified

Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Slides Recall that a silhouette curve is created in a mold model where the draft on the reference model instantaneously changes from positive to negative when viewed from the pull direction. Because undercut areas can also cause draft to instantaneously change, the system may also create the silhouette curve along undercut geometry zones. The Slides option enables you to specify mold volumes that already account for undercut geometry zones in the reference model. When mold volumes are specified, the system automatically excludes these unnecessary edges CREO精诚网 and creates correct parting curves.

中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Slides Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Parting-Line_Slides Task 1:

CURVE-SLIDES.ASM

Specify mold volumes to exclude undercut areas during silhouette curve creation.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select the CURVE-SLIDES_ WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice that the mold model contains three slider mold volumes. 7. Click Silhouette Curve from the Design Features group. 8. Click Preview from the Silhouette Curve dialog box. 9. Notice that the system attempts to create the same silhouette curves for the undercut geometry that the slider mold volumes already created.

10. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, select Slides and click Define. 11. Press CTRL and select the three slider mold volumes. 12. Click Done Refs > Done/Return from the menu manager.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 10

© 2011 PTC

13. Click OK from the Silhouette Curve dialog box. 14. Notice that the system no longer creates silhouette curves for the undercut geometry.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 11

Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Loop Selection The Loop Selection option enables you to control the location of curve segments in reference to the part edges and specify which loops are included in the curve. • Loop selection: – Loops created at every shutoff location. – Status options: ♦ Included ♦ Excluded • Chain selection options: – Upper – Lower – Single

Figure 1 – Included Versus Excluded Loops

Figure 2 – Upper Versus Lower Chains

Including and Excluding Silhouette Curve Loops During silhouette curve creation, the system may create curves along edges that you do not want included. You can selectively remove curves along edges that you do not want curves created for using the Loop Selection option in the Silhouette Curve dialog box. Selecting the Loop Selection option causes the Loop Selection dialog box to appear. The Loops tab in the Loop Selection dialog box lists the loops of curves which comprise the silhouette curve, and whether their status is Included or Excluded. When you select a loop in the dialog box, it highlights in the mold model. Loops are typically created at every location in the mold model where there is CREO精诚网 a shutoff. A shutoff is any surface where the mold core and cavity contact. When the mold closes the core and cavity it creates a seal that shuts off 中国CREO技术领航者 that area of the mold. One loop typically is created along the exterior of the Module 8 | Page 12

© 2011 PTC

reference model. Other loops are created at each interior hole or cut. Loops are also created at areas of undercut geometry. Loops are, by default, included in the final silhouette curve, although you can exclude any loop from the final silhouette curve. The most common reason loops are excluded is because the shutoff at that specific location is being formed by a slider or saddle. In Figure 1, the two loops around the opening are excluded. Another way to exclude loops created by undercuts is to use the Slides Silhouette Curve option.

Specifying Edges for Silhouette Curve Creation When the system encounters a vertical surface or a surface that has no draft for which a silhouette curve loop is to be included, the system may select the wrong edge to create the silhouette curve along. In most cases you can change which edge to create the silhouette curve along. The following status options are available: • Upper – The chain is currently located at the uppermost edges of a vertical surface. The upper edge is higher relative to the positive Z-axis, or pull direction, as shown in the left image of Figure 2. When the chain is specified as upper, the shutoff effectively causes the mold feature to occur in the core mold component. • Lower – The chain is currently located at the lowermost edges of a vertical surface. The lower edge is lower relative to the positive Z-axis, or pull direction, as shown in the right image of Figure 2. When the chain is specified as lower, the shutoff effectively causes the mold feature to occur in the cavity mold component. • Single – You cannot move the chain for a Single location because the edges that the chain lies on are associated with a drafted surface. The Chains tab in the Loop Selection dialog box displays both the chain number, and its status. The chain number is displayed as A-B, where A is the corresponding loop number from the Loops tab that the chain belongs to, and B is an incremental number for multiple chains belonging to a single loop, starting with 0. For example, if there are three chains belonging to loop number 1, then the three chains are numbered 1-0, 1-1, and 1-2.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 13

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Loop Selection Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Parting-Line_Loop Task 1:

LOOP-SELECTION.ASM

Exclude loops of a silhouette curve.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, right-click LOOP-SELECTION_WRK.PRT and select Hide. 3. Click Silhouette Curve from the Design Features group. 4. Click Preview from the Silhouette Curve dialog box. 5. Notice the silhouette curve that is to be created. 6. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, select Loop Selection and click Define. 7. Notice that the Loop Selection dialog box contains three loops. • Select loop number 1. 8. Notice that this outer loop highlights blue in the graphics window. We want to keep this loop. 9. In the Loop Selection dialog box, select loop number 2. 10. Notice that this loop is on the right side of the opening. 11. You later handle this opening using a method other than silhouette curves, so it needs to be excluded from the silhouette curve. 12. In the Loop Selection dialog box, click Exclude.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 14

© 2011 PTC

13. In the Loop Selection dialog box, select loop number 3 and notice that this loop is on the left side of the opening. 14. Again, you handle this opening using a method other than silhouette curves, so it needs to be excluded from the silhouette curve. 15. In the Loop Selection dialog box, click Exclude. Task 2:

Switch the location of chains for a loop in a silhouette curve.

1. In the Loop Selection dialog box, select the Chains tab. • Notice that you can only see the chains for included loops. • Select chain number 1-0. • Notice that its status is Single. This chain is on a drafted surface and cannot be changed.

2. In the Loop Selection dialog box, select chain number 1-1. • Press CTRL and select chain number 1-2. • Notice that both of their Statuses are Upper. • Notice that both chains are to be created on the upper edges of the vertical surfaces.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 15

3. In the Loop Selection dialog box, click Lower to switch both chains to the lower edges of the vertical surfaces. • Click OK. 4. Click OK from the Silhouette Curve dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 16

© 2011 PTC

Creating a Skirt Surface You can use a skirt surface to automatically create the mold model parting surface. • The skirt surface is created using specified datum curves. – The silhouette curve parting line is usually selected. • Inner holes in the reference model are filled using silhouette curve loops. • Outer curve loops are extended to the workpiece boundaries.

Figure 1 – Viewing the Silhouette Curve Parting Line

Figure 2 – Viewing the Completed Skirt Surface

Creating a Skirt Surface You can create the parting surface for a mold model by using Parting in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group. The system can Surface help you create a parting surface automatically by using the Skirt Surface tool. This tool helps you create a parting surface automatically by creating a skirt surface. The parting surface is ultimately used to split the mold model into the mold core and mold cavity. So you can think of the parting surface as the location of all metal-to-metal contact between the mold core and cavity. In CREO精诚网 order to create the skirt surface you must specify the curves that the system should use. You can specify curves in any of the following ways:

中国CREO技术领航者

• One By One – Enables you to select individual curves or edges. © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 17

• Curve Chain – Enables you to select a chain of curves. • Feat Curves – Enables you to select all curves that belong to the specified feature. The skirt surface is usually created by specifying an existing parting line silhouette curve. The silhouette curve is selected using the Feat Curves method of specifying curves. However, if you do not want to use the entire silhouette curve, or if you want to use the silhouette curve in conjunction with other datum curves, you can use the Curve Chain or One By One options. The Ref Model, Workpiece, and Direction must also be defined to create the skirt surface. However, if the process workflow has been followed these items should have already been automatically defined for you. The Ref Model is the reference model used in the mold model, the Workpiece is the workpiece used in the mold model, and the Direction is the pull direction of the mold model. Once you have specified these items, the system classifies each closed loop of curves into one of two types: • Inner loops – Loops that are filled by the skirt surface. • Outer loops – Loops that the skirt surface extends outward through. Usually, the system is able to automatically determine the loop classifications. Once the classifications are made, the system automatically creates the skirt parting surface feature by doing the following: • It fills the inner holes (shutoffs) in the reference model using the inner loops from the Silhouette curve or other selected datum curve. In Figure 2, all five interior shutoffs have been filled using loops from the specified silhouette curve. • It extends the outer loops of the Silhouette curve or other datum curve to the boundaries of the workpiece. In Figure 2, the skirt surface extends out to the boundaries of the workpiece. Similar to mold volumes, you can rename the parting surface by starting the Parting Surface tool, right-clicking, and selecting Properties, or clicking Properties

from the Controls group.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 18

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating a Skirt Surface Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Skirt-Surface Task 1:

SKIRT-SURFACE.ASM

Create a skirt surface in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select the SKIRT-SURFACE_ WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Select the silhouette curve that has already been created. 7. Notice that the silhouette curve consists of six loops – one around the entire reference model, and one loop each for each interior shutoff. 8. Click Parting Surface group. 9. Click Skirt Surface

from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume from the Surfacing group.

10. Select the silhouette curve and click Done from the menu manager. 11. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box. 12. Click OK

.

13. Notice that all five interior silhouette curve loops have been filled by the skirt surface. 14. Notice also that the skirt surface has been extended from the outer silhouette curve loop to the sides of the workpiece.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 19

15. Spin the model so that you can see the underside of the reference model.

Task 2:

Edit the silhouette curve chain status to modify the skirt surface.

1. Zoom in on the interior shutoffs. 2. Notice that the skirt surface for each shutoff is located on the outer reference model surface. 3. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.

4. Edit the definition of SILH_CURVE_1. 5. Click Suspend All from the menu manager to temporarily suspend the skirt surface feature. 6. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, double-click Loop Selection. 7. In the Loop Selection dialog box, select the Chains tab. • Select chain 2-1, press CTRL, and select chains 4-1, 5-1, and 6-1. • Click Lower to switch the status of the four loops. • Click OK. 8. Click OK from the Silhouette Curve dialog box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 20

© 2011 PTC

9. Zoom in on the interior shutoffs. 10. Notice that the skirt surface is located on the inner reference model surface.

11. Spin the model so that you can view the underside of the reference model and inspect the skirt surface.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 21

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extend Curves The Extend Curves option provides a further level of control that enables you to exclude curves from being extended during skirt surface creation. • By default, all selected curves are included. • The Extend Curves option enables you to exclude curve segments.

Figure 1 – Default Skirt Surface

Figure 2 – Curve Segments Excluded

Figure 3 – Additional Curve Segment Excluded

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extend Curves By default, all curves selected for the skirt surface are extended either inward or outward to create the surface. The Extend Curves option provides a further level of control to exclude curves from being extended. The Extend Curves tab in the Extension Control dialog box contains two columns: • Include Curve – Specifies which curve segments are extended in the skirt surface. • Exclude Curve – Specifies which curve segments are not extended in the skirt surface. Every curve specified for the skirt surface is broken up into segments. Each segment is displayed in the Extend Curves tab. By default, all curve segments are located in the Include Curve column of the tab, meaning that they are all extended. You can exclude curve segments from being extended by moving them over to the Exclude Curve column of the tab. When you place the cursor over a given curve segment it highlights in the graphics windowCREO精诚网 so you can determine where it is located in the reference model. When creating a skirt surface, you can either select an entire silhouette 中国CREO技术领航者 curve and then exclude curve segments as desired, or you can simply

Module 8 | Page 22

© 2011 PTC

select the desired curves one by one for the skirt surface definition. Either way, you achieve the same resultant skirt surface. The method you use is determined by what is most efficient. For example, if there are 20 segments in a silhouette curve and you need 18 of them for the skirt surface, it would be most efficient to select the entire silhouette curve and then exclude the two unneeded curve segments. Conversely, if you only need 2 of the 20 curve segments, it would be more efficient to individually select the two desired curves, rather than selecting the entire curve and then excluding the unneeded 18 curve segments.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 23

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extend Curves Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Skirt-Surface_Extend Task 1:

EXTEND-CURVES.ASM

Exclude curves from a skirt surface in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Notice the silhouette curve that has already been created.

3. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group. 4. Click Skirt Surface the Surfacing group.

tool from

5. Select the silhouette curve and click Done from the menu manager. 6. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box. 7. Click Repaint

.

8. Notice that the surface extends out from all curve segments of the silhouette curve.

9. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension. 10. In the Extension Control dialog box, select Curve 213. 11. Notice that the curve segment highlights in the graphics window.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 24

© 2011 PTC

12. In the Extension Control dialog box, press SHIFT and select Curve 216. 13. Notice that all four curve segments are selected and highlight in the graphics window. 14. Click Exclude Curve to exclude these curve segments.

15. Click OK from the Extension Control dialog box. 16. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box. 17. Click OK group.

from the Controls

18. Notice that the skirt surface is not created through the excluded curve segments. 19. Edit the definition of the Skirt Surface id. 20. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension. 21. In the Extension Control dialog box, select Curve 213 and click Include Curve . • Click OK. 22. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 25

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Tangent Conditions The Tangent Conditions option enables you to specify surfaces on the reference model to which the resulting skirt surface must be tangent. • Specify which surfaces the skirt surface must be tangent to. • You can exclude adjacent curve segments from the tangent condition.

Figure 1 – No Tangent Condition Applied to Skirt Surface

Figure 2 – Tangent Condition Applied to Skirt Surface

Figure 3 – Curves Excluded from Tangent Condition

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Tangent Conditions The Tangent Conditions option enables you to specify surfaces on the reference model to which the resulting skirt surface must be tangent when extending through the parting line curves. You must specify the following when defining tangent conditions for the skirt surface: • Tangent surfaces – Specify the reference model surfaces adjacent to the parting curve to which the skirt surface must be tangent. • Include Curve – The skirt surface must extend through these curves tangent to the adjacent surfaces. By default, all curves adjacent to the selected surfaces are included. CREO精诚网 • 中国CREO技术领航者 Exclude Curve – The tangent condition is not applied to the curves in this column of the Tangent Conditions tab. Module 8 | Page 26

© 2011 PTC

In Figure 1, no tangent conditions have been applied to the resulting skirt surface. In Figure 2, the tangent condition has been applied to all outer surfaces of the reference model. Consequently, the skirt surface extends through the parting line tangent to the adjacent surfaces. However, in Figure 3, all but the left and right curves have been excluded from the tangent condition. As a result, the skirt surface is only tangent to the left and right reference model surfaces.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 27

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Tangent Conditions Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Skirt-Surface_Tangent Task 1:

TANGENT-COND.ASM

Create an automatic parting surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select TANGENT-COND_WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Click Parting Surface group. 7. Click Skirt Surface Surfacing group.

from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume

from the

8. Select silhouette curve PART-LINE and click Done from the menu manager. 9. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box. 10. Click OK group.

from the Controls

11. Notice that the parting surface extends normal to the workpiece boundary.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 28

© 2011 PTC

Task 2:

Set tangent conditions for the skirt surface.

1. Edit the definition of Skirt Surface id 388. 2. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension. 3. In the Extension Control dialog box, select the Tangent Conditions tab. 4. In the Tangent Conditions tab, click Select Tangent Surfaces . 5. Press CTRL and select the eight outer surfaces that are adjacent to the silhouette curve. 6. Click OK from the Select dialog box. 7. Click OK from the Extension Control dialog box. 8. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box. 9. Spin the model and notice that the skirt surface now extends tangent to the surfaces adjacent to the silhouette curve. 10. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation. 11. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension and select the Tangent Conditions tab. 12. In the Extension Control dialog box, click Select Included Curves . • Press CTRL and select the six curves highlighted green. • Click OK from the Select dialog box. and • Click Exclude Curve click OK.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 29

13. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box. 14. Spin the model and notice that, while the skirt surface still extends from the selected curves, it is only tangent to the curves included in the tangent conditions.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 30

© 2011 PTC

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extension Directions You can add or modify the direction that the skirt surface extends from the silhouette curve segments. • Extension directions can significantly alter the shape of the skirt surface. • Arrows denote direction at each segment vertex. – Orange — Default direction – Cyan — User-defined direction – Red — Tangent direction • Select location and direction reference.

Figure 1 – Completed Skirt Surface

Figure 2 – Viewing Default Extension Directions

Figure 3 – Viewing User-Defined Extension Directions

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extension Directions By default, when the skirt surface extends from a silhouette curve, it extends normal to the curve. The direction of extension is defined at every curve segment endpoint. If the directions at the curve endpoints overlap, the skirt surface will fail. You can modify the direction of extension for the curve endpoints in the Extension Directions tab of the Extension Control dialog box. This enables you to significantly change the resulting shape of the skirt surface. For example, in Figure 1, the extension directions for the left side of the skirt surface have been modified, causing the resulting shape to be different. CREO精诚网

When you select the Extension Directions tab, the extension directions for 中国CREO技术领航者 each of the curve segment endpoints displays in the graphics window. © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 31

Consider the following points regarding extension directions: • Default extension directions display with orange arrows, as shown in Figure 2. • Extension directions that you have modified or added display with cyan arrows, as shown in Figure 3. • If you apply tangent conditions to curve segments for the skirt surface, the extension directions display with red arrows.

Modifying and Adding Extension Directions You can modify extension directions as a means to solve a failing skirt surface, or you can modify them simply to modify the shape of the resulting parting surface. You can also add additional extension directions. In order to modify or add an extension direction, you must specify the following: • Location — You can select either an existing included extend curve endpoint or you can create a datum point at a new location where you want to add an extension direction. • Direction reference — Specifies the direction in which the skirt surface will be extended. You can select any of the following references: – Plane — The skirt surface is extended perpendicular to the plane. You can select either datum planes or planar surfaces. – Curve, Edge, or Axis — The skirt surface is extended along the direction of the specified curve, edge, or axis. – Coordinate System — The skirt surface is extended along the specified coordinate system axis, which you must specify. Each added or modified extension direction appears in the Extension Directions tab as a point set. For each defined point set, you can perform the following operations: • Remove — Enables you to remove the point set. • Redefine — Enables you to select a different location for the point set. • Direction — Enables you to select a different direction reference. You can also add new point sets.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 32

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extension Directions Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Skirt-Surface_Direction Task 1:

EXTEND-DIR.ASM

Modify the extension directions of a skirt surface in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select EXTEND-DIR_WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Click Parting Surface

and click Skirt Surface

.

7. Select EXTEND-DIR_WRK.PRT, select the silhouette curve, and click Done from the menu manager. 8. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box. 9. Notice that the skirt surface fails. 10. Notice also the warning message in the Message Log.

11. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension. 12. Notice the warning message and notice where the problem is occurring based on the highlighted curve segments. 13. Click OK from the Warning dialog box.

14. Select the Extension Directions tab. 15. Notice the default direction arrows at the problem area at the lower right are pointing in two CREO精诚网 different directions.

中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 33

16. In the Extension Directions tab, click Add. • Select the vertex shown. • Click Done from the menu manager.

17. Select the right workpiece surface and click Okay from the menu manager. 18. Notice the new user-defined direction at the vertex.

19. Click OK from the Extension Control dialog box. 20. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box and rotate the model to observe the parting surface.

Task 2:

Add an extension direction to a skirt surface.

1. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 2. Click Named Views select BACK.

and

3. Notice that the bottom of the skirt surface curves upward. 4. Click Named Views select 3D. 5. Enable Plane Display group.

and

and Point Display

from the Show

6. In the ribbon, select the Parting Surface tab.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 34

© 2011 PTC

7. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Extension and select the Extension Directions tab. • Click Add. • Prehighlight datum point PNT0 and select it. • Click Done from the menu manager. 8. Prehighlight datum plane EXTENSION_DIR, select it, and click Okay from the menu manager. 9. Notice the new user-defined direction and click OK from the Extension Control dialog box. 10. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box. 11. Click OK group.

from the Controls

12. Spin the model and observe the skirt surface.

13. Disable Plane Display Point Display

and

.

14. Orient to the BACK view orientation and notice that the surface no longer curves upward.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 35

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: ShutOff Extension You can specify a location other than the workpiece boundaries that the skirt surface extends to. • ShutOff Extension options: – ShutOff Dist — Uniform offset – Boundary — Sketch or select • ShutOff Plane — Shutoff extension extends up to the shutoff plane • Draft Angle — Applies draft to Z-direction shutoff extension surfaces

Figure 1 – Shutoff Distance Specified for Shutoff Extension

Figure 2 – Selected Boundary Shutoff Extension

Figure 3 – Sketched Boundary Shutoff Extension

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: ShutOff Extension By default, the outer loops of a specified silhouette curve are extended to the boundaries of the workpiece. This may cause an undesirable shape in the resulting core and cavity mold components. You can specify a shutoff extension to stop the skirt surface from extending all the way out to the workpiece boundaries by using the ShutOff Ext option in the Skirt Surface dialog box. The ShutOff Ext option enables you to specify the amount of extension toward the workpiece boundaries that the skirt surface will undergo before stopping, extending in the pull direction, and finally stopping at the workpiece boundaries. There are two methods available for specifying the shutoff extension location:

CREO精诚网 • ShutOff Dist – Specifies a uniform offset value around the silhouette curve perimeter that the skirt surface will extend. In Figure 1, a shutoff distance 中国CREO技术领航者 of 2 was specified. Module 8 | Page 36

© 2011 PTC

• Boundary – Enables you to specify your own boundary that the skirt surface will extend out to. You can use either of the following two methods to specify the boundary: – Select – Enables you to select an existing sketch as the boundary. In Figure 2, the sketch created on the top surface of the workpiece was selected as the boundary. – Sketch – Enables you to sketch the boundary on-the-fly by specifying the sketch plane, reference plane, and reference direction. In Figure 3, the boundary was sketched on the top surface of the workpiece. Regardless of which boundary method is used, the boundary must form a closed loop. It is not necessary for the boundary to be located on a specific sketching plane or even a sketching plane that is perpendicular to the pull direction. However, the boundary is ultimately extended in the pull direction, so if the boundary is created on a plane that is not normal to the pull direction, you may not get the expected result. When the skirt surface extends outward from the silhouette curve, it stops either at the workpiece boundaries or a shutoff extension, whichever it encounters first. If the selected boundary falls outside of the workpiece boundaries, the skirt surface will stop at the workpiece boundaries. In Figure 3, only one of the four sides of the sketched square boundary falls within the workpiece boundaries. Hence, the skirt surface stops extending at the workpiece boundaries on three sides, and at the sketched boundary on the fourth side.

Specifying the ShutOff Plane The ShutOff Plane option is used in conjunction with the ShutOff Extension option. The shutoff plane is the planar reference that the shutoff extension extends to. The shutoff extension extends in the positive or negative Z-axis (pull direction) up to the shutoff plane and finally extends outward again to the workpiece boundaries. The shutoff plane specified in all three figures is the one that is displayed. While the ShutOff Plane is optional in the Skirt Surface dialog box, it is a required reference if a shutoff extension is defined. Without the shutoff plane defined, the shutoff extension does not extend at all in the Z-axis, and therefore is not used. The following rules apply to the shutoff plane reference specified: • • • •

The reference you specify must be planar. There can be only one shutoff plane specified. The shutoff plane must be normal to the pull direction. The shutoff plane may be above the skirt surface. However, the resulting extension may not create valid geometry for a mold parting line.

Specifying the Draft Angle The Draft Angle option is also used in conjunction with the ShutOff Extension option, although it is not a requirement. The draft angle option drafts the Z-direction surfaces of the shutoff extension by the specified draft angle CREO精诚网 value. You might want to apply a draft angle to these surfaces to help with wear in the resulting mold core and cavity. Note that you can only specify a 中国CREO技术领航者 positive draft angle. The draft angle specified in all three figures is 6. © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 37

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: ShutOff Extension Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Skirt-Surface_ShutOff Task 1:

SHUTOFF-EXT.ASM

Create a shutoff extension by specifying an offset distance.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Select SHUTOFF-EXT_WRK. PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice the skirt surface shape. 7. Edit the definition of Skirt Surface id 1501. 8. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click ShutOff Ext. 9. In the menu manager, click ShutOff Dist, type 2 as the value, and press ENTER. 10. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box and click Repaint

.

11. Notice that there is no difference in the skirt surface shape. 12. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click ShutOff Plane. • Select datum plane SHUTOFF and click Done/Return from the menu manager. • Click Preview. and notice 13. Click Repaint CREO精诚网 that the shutoff extension now extends to the shutoff plane. 中国CREO技术领航者

Module 8 | Page 38

© 2011 PTC

14. In the Skirt Surface dialog box, double-click Draft Angle. • Type 6 as the value, press ENTER, and click Preview. and notice that 15. Click Repaint the shutoff extension surfaces have been drafted.

Task 2:

Select a new shutoff extension boundary.

1. Double-click ShutOff Ext. 2. In the menu manager, click Boundary > Select > One By One. 3. Query-select the entire SHUTOFF_BOUNDARY sketch and click Done from the menu manager.

4. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box and click Repaint

.

5. Notice the new shutoff extension shape. 6. Notice that the shutoff extension still extends to the shutoff plane. 7. Notice that the shutoff extension surfaces are still drafted.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 39

Task 3:

Sketch a new shutoff extension boundary.

1. Double-click ShutOff Ext. 2. In the menu manager, click Boundary > Sketch. 3. Select the top workpiece surface as the sketch plane. 4. Click Okay > Default from the menu manager. 5. Select datum plane MOLD_FRONT and the right workpiece surface as references, and click Close from the References dialog box. 6. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 7. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu and sketch, constrain, and dimension the sketch, as shown.

8. Click OK

.

9. Click OK from the Skirt Surface dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 40

© 2011 PTC

Analyzing Surface Editing and Manipulation Tools When working with surfaces, it is often necessary to edit and manipulate quilts to achieve your desired design intent. • Tools include: – Extend – Trim – Copy and Paste – Offset – Mirror – Merge Figure 1 – Extending a Surface to Plane

Figure 2 – Trimming a Quilt using Geometry

Figure 3 – Mirroring a Quilt

Analyzing Surface Editing and Manipulation Tools When working with surfaces, it is often necessary to edit and manipulate quilts to achieve your desired design intent. You can use the following tools to edit and manipulate surfaces. Surface editing and manipulation tools are covered in greater detail in PTC's surfacing courses.

Extending Surfaces You can extend a quilt using either of the following methods: • Extend Original Surface — Extends the surface boundary edge chain along the original surface. This option has three additional options that determine how the extension is created: – Same — Creates the extension of the same type as the original surface CREO精诚网 (for example, plane, cylinder, cone, or spline surface). The original surface is extended past its selected boundary edge chain, and does 中国CREO技术领航者 not create an additional surface patch. This is the default extend option. © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 41

– Tangent — Creates the extension as a ruled surface that is tangent to the original surface. With this option an additional surface patch is created. – Approximate — Creates the extension as a boundary blend between the boundary edges of the original surface and the edges of the extension. This method is useful when extending the surface up to a vertex that does not lie along a straight edge. With this option an additional surface patch is created. — Extends the boundary edge chain up to • Extend Surface To Plane a specified plane in the direction normal to this plane. With this option an additional surface patch is created.

Trimming Surfaces A surface trim is analogous to a solid cut, except that it trims away a portion of a surface. You can create a surface trim as an extrude, revolve, sweep, blend, and so on. You can also trim a selected surface quilt using other geometry such as planes, quilts, and curves or edges. Once you have specified the surface to be trimmed and the entity to do the trimming, you must specify which side is to be kept. You can opt to keep one side, the other side, or both sides.

Copying and Pasting Surfaces Copying and pasting surfaces enables you to create an overlay of a surface so that you can then perform manipulations to the copied surface. You can copy and paste any surface or surface set, either from a quilt or a solid. You can use either CTRL+C and CTRL+V or the Copy and Paste icons from the Operations group in the ribbon. You should only use the Copy functionality in situations where you do not have proper references to create the parting surfaces. The copy functionality can result in a lot of surface features, especially when you are working with a complex design.

Offsetting Surfaces You can create a surface quilt offset a distance value from another quilt or a solid surface. The offset surface remains dependent on the original surface. When offsetting surfaces, you can specify the fit type as either Normal to Surface, Automatic Fit, or Controlled Fit.

Mirroring Surfaces You can transform a surface quilt by mirroring it. To mirror a quilt, select the quilt and click Mirror , specifying a reference plane for the mirror. A new surface feature is created.

Merging Surfaces You can merge two or more intersecting or adjacent quilts to create surfaces with 2-sided edges. Merging surfaces is covered more in depth in other topics.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

Module 8 | Page 42

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Surface Editing and Manipulation Tools Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Surface_Manipulate Task 1:

EDIT-MANIPULATE.PRT

Extend a surface in a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Select feature Revolve 1 and select the top surface edge. from the Editing

3. Click Extend group.

4. In the dashboard, click Extend Surface To Plane and select datum plane EXTEND from the model tree. 5. Click Complete Feature the dashboard.

from

6. De-select all geometry.

Task 2:

Trim a surface in a part model.

1. Select Revolve 1. 2. Select Quilt:F5. 3. Click Trim group.

from the Editing

4. Select the projected curve.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 43

5. Click Complete Feature

.

6. De-select all geometry.

Task 3:

Mirror the quilt in the part model.

1. Select Revolve 1 and select Quilt:F5. from the Editing 2. Click Mirror group and select datum plane MIRROR. 3. Click Complete Feature

.

4. De-select all geometry. Task 4:

Offset a quilt in the part model.

1. Select Revolve 1 and select Quilt:F5. 2. Click Offset group.

from the Editing

3. In the dashboard, type 40 as the offset value and press ENTER. 4. Click Complete Feature

.

5. De-select all geometry. Task 5:

Copy and paste a portion of a surface quilt.

1. Disable Plane Display

.

2. Edit the selection filter to Geometry. 3. Query-select the lowest surface of the mirrored quilt. 4. Press CTRL and query-select the highest surface of the mirrored CREO精诚网 quilt.

中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 44

© 2011 PTC

5. Press CTRL+C to copy the surfaces and press CTRL+V to paste the surfaces. 6. Click Complete Feature

.

7. In the model tree, select Mirror 1, right-click, and select Hide.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 45

Merging Surfaces Merging a quilt is required for operations such as creating solids from quilts. • Colors: – Orange = one-sided edges. – Purple = two-sided edges. • Merge makes one-sided edges two-sided. • Merge options: – Intersect – Join

Figure 1 – Surface Merge Keep Options

Figure 2 – Surfaces Edge Display of Separate Quilts

Figure 3 – Surface Edge Display of Merged Quilts

Merging Surfaces You can merge two or more intersecting or adjacent quilts. Merging a quilt makes it selectable as a single entity for other operations, and is required for operations such as creating solids from quilts. Remember the following: • Surfaces are shown using orange and purple highlighting on the edges. • Orange denotes outer or one-sided edges. • Purple denotes inner or two-sided edges because they border two surface patches. Therefore: CREO精诚网

• 中国CREO技术领航者 Merging a surface results in the creation of two-sided edges from one-sided edges. In Figure 2, the adjacent quilt surface edges are separate, Module 8 | Page 46

© 2011 PTC

one-sided edges, as they display in orange. In Figure 3, the quilts have been merged to form two-sided, purple edges. • Merged surface edges appear in purple.

Merge Options There are two types of merge operations, used for different surface geometry: • Intersect – Primarily used for intersecting quilts, when a trimming effect is desired, although it can be used on adjacent quilts. The Intersect option provides up to two flip arrows, enabling four possible geometry outcomes, as shown in Figure 1. Intersect is the default merge option. • Join – Recommended for use on adjacent quilts. Join can also be used to join surfaces when no trimming effect is desired. For example, you could join two surfaces that meet in a “T,” without having to decide which sides to keep.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 47

PROCEDURE - Merging Surfaces Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Merge Task 1:

MERGE.PRT

Merge surfaces in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select the oval surface. 3. Press CTRL and select the boundary surface. 4. In the ribbon, click Merge from the Editing group. 5. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. • Select Intersect, if necessary. 6. Click Preview Feature 7. Click Resume Feature

. .

8. In the Merge dashboard, click Change Second Quilt Side 9. Click Preview Feature

10. Click Resume Feature

.

.

.

11. In the graphics window, click both arrows to flip them. 12. Click Preview Feature

.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 48

© 2011 PTC

13. Click Resume Feature

.

14. In the dashboard, click Change Second Quilt Side

.

15. Click Complete Feature de-select all geometry.

Task 2:

and

Join surfaces in a part model.

1. Press CTRL and select JOIN1, JOIN2, and JOIN3. 2. Right-click and select Unhide. 3. De-select all geometry. 4. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden from the Display Style types drop-down menu. 5. Notice the one-sided orange edges between the main surface and the three “joined” surfaces. 6. Press CTRL and select the main center quilt and right quilt. 7. In the ribbon, click Merge from the Editing group. 8. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. • Select Join.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 49

9. Press CTRL and drag a window around all quilts to select them. 10. Click Complete Feature de-select all geometry.

and

11. Notice that the edges between the main surface and three joined surfaces are two-sided purple edges. from the 12. Select Shading Display Style types drop-down menu. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 50

© 2011 PTC

Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces A saddle shutoff typically requires you to create multiple surfaces to achieve the desired shape. • Create the surfaces. • Perform surface manipulations. • Merge the surfaces to create the final shutoff.

Figure 1 – Saddle Surface Created

Figure 2 – Face Surfaces Created

Figure 3 – Final Saddle Shutoff

Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces To handle a saddle shutoff within the part, you must create the surfaces which represent the shutoff faces. A saddle shutoff is a bit more challenging than the parting line surface or a face shutoff because you generally need several surfaces to form the required shape. Typically, you create the saddle surface, and then create the face surfaces. You can extrude or revolve the surfaces, or use more advanced geometry creation methods like blended surfaces, depending upon the desired geometry. You can even copy existing surfaces and paste them. You can then manipulate these surfaces by extending, trimming, and offsetting them if needed. Once the saddle surface and face surfaces have been created, you must merge the surfaces together to form the required shape. To create surfaces for saddle shutoffs, it can be beneficial to use existing geometry edges and surfaces as references for your CREO精诚网 surfaces. However, remember that if you use existing geometry, 中国CREO技术领航者 your surfaces become dependent on that geometry. © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 51

PROCEDURE - Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Surface_Saddle-ShutOff Task 1:

SADDLE-SHUTOFF.ASM

Complete the saddle shutoff surface in the mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Select SADDLE-SHUTOFF_ WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. .

6. Click Parting Surface

from the 7. Click Properties Controls group. • Edit the Name to SADDLE_SHUTOFF and press ENTER. 8. Click Extrude Shapes group.

from the

9. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. 10. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT as the Sketch Plane. 11. In the Sketch dialog box, select Top as the Orientation and click Sketch. 12. Click Sketch View

.

from the 13. Select Hidden Line Display Style types drop-down menu.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 52

© 2011 PTC

14. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types:

.

15. Click Project from the Sketching group, select the seven edges, and click Close from the Type dialog box. from the 16. Select Shading Display Style types drop-down menu. 17. Click OK

.

18. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 19. In the dashboard, edit the depth to Symmetric . • Edit the depth to 100 and click Complete Feature .

20. Select datum plane MOLD_FRONT as the Sketch Plane. 21. Click Extrude

.

22. Click Sketch View

. .

23. Click Hidden Line

24. Click References from the Setup group and select the right angled silhouette edge. 25. Click Close from the References dialog box.

26. Click Line Chain and sketch the line on the angled reference, starting at the horizontal reference and stopping above the saddle surface. 27. Click Shading

CREO精诚网 . 中国CREO技术领航者

.

28. Click OK

© 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 53

29. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 30. In the dashboard, edit the depth to Symmetric . • Edit the depth to 100 and click Complete Feature .

31. Select the quilt you just extruded. 32. Click the Editing group drop-down menu and select Mirror

.

33. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT and click Complete Feature from the dashboard.

34. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 35. Disable Plane Display

.

36. Select the Parting Surface tab. 37. Edit the selection filter to Quilts. 38. Select the saddle quilt, press CTRL, and select the right face quilt. 39. Click Merge group.

from the Editing

40. In the dashboard, click Change and Change First Quilt Side Second Quilt Side as necessary until you get the correct final geometry. • Click Complete Feature

.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 54

© 2011 PTC

41. Select the saddle quilt, press CTRL, and select the left face quilt. 42. Click Merge

.

43. In the dashboard, click Change and Change First Quilt Side Second Quilt Side as necessary until you get the correct final geometry. • Click Complete Feature 44. Click OK group.

.

from the Controls

45. Spin the model and inspect the saddle surface

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 55

Creating a Parting Surface Manually You can create the parting surface manually in circumstances where the skirt surface does not provide the desired shape. • You can use a combination of manual parting surface and skirt surface techniques. • To manually create a parting surface: – Start the Parting Surface tool. – Create all surface features for a loop. – Merge the surfaces together.

Figure 2 – Manual Parting Surface Created

Figure 1 – Mold Model Before Manual Parting Surface Created

Figure 3 – Completed Parting Surface

Creating a Parting Surface Manually Sometimes the silhouette curve and skirt surface features do not provide you the desired parting surface shape. You can create the parting surface manually in these types of circumstances. You may also use a combination of a skirt surface and manual parting surface for a mold model. The skirt surface can be used for the parting surface in the locations where the proper geometry has been created, and a manual parting surface can be created in areas where the skirt surface does not provide the desired shape. To create a parting surface manually, you can click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group and then use the various basic and advanced surface creation techniques. Each of the surfaces created belongs to the parting surface feature. You can also use the various editing and manipulation tools on the surfaces. After all surfaces have been created for a given loop area in the mold model, you must use Merge to merge the surfaces together before completing the parting surface feature. In Figure 2, a total of three surfaces were created to close the loop and create the parting surface. Two surfaces are fill surfaces, and the third surface is an CREO精诚网 extruded surface. Once all three surfaces were created they were merged together. At this point the silhouette curve could be used to create the outer 中国CREO技术领航者 loop of the parting surface and to fill the hole shutoff in the boss. Module 8 | Page 56

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating a Parting Surface Manually Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Parting-Surface_Manual Task 1:

SURFACE-MANUAL.ASM

Create a manual parting surface in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select SILH_CURVE_1 from the model tree. 3. Notice that there is no loop for the square hole to the left.

4. Click Parting Surface from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group. 5. Click Fill group.

from the Surfacing

6. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. 7. Zoom in and select the surface shown as the Sketch Plane. 8. Select datum plane MOLD_FRONT as the Reference and click Sketch. 9. Click References from the Setup group and select the five surfaces as references. 10. Click Close from the References dialog box. 11. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types:

.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 57

12. Click Line Chain the eight lines. 13. Click OK

and sketch

.

14. Click Complete Feature

.

15. Press ALT and select the surface shown as the Sketch Plane. 16. Click Fill group.

from the Surfacing

17. Click References and select datum plane MOLD_FRONT as a reference. 18. Select the flat surface, rounded surface, and two surface edges as references. 19. Click Close from the References dialog box. 20. Click Line Chain the five lines.

and sketch

21. Select Center and Ends from the Arc types drop-down menu and sketch the arc. 22. Click OK Feature

and click Complete .

23. Click in the background to de-select all geometry.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 58

© 2011 PTC

24. Click Extrude

.

25. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. 26. Click Use Previous. 27. Click References , select datum plane MOLD_FRONT, and the two edges of the lower surface. • Click Close. 28. Click Line Chain the three lines. 29. Click OK

and sketch

.

30. Edit the depth to To Selected and select the first filled surface. 31. Click Complete Feature

.

32. Edit the selection filter to Quilts. 33. Select the top flat quilt, press CTRL, and select the extruded quilt. 34. Click Merge group.

from the Editing

35. Press CTRL and select the smaller filled surface. 36. Click Complete Feature 37. Click OK group.

.

from the Controls

CREO精诚网 This completes the procedure. 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 8 | Page 59

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 8 | Page 60

© 2011 PTC

Module

9

Splitting Mold Volumes Module Overview After the necessary mold volumes and parting surface have been created, you must split the workpiece and mold volumes at the parting surface into the final core, cavity, and slider volumes, as well as any other volumes that are to become mold components in the final mold. In this module, you learn how to split the workpiece and mold volumes, as well as how to blank and unblank mold items in the mold model.

Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to: • Split the workpiece. • Split mold volumes. • Split volumes using multiple parting surfaces. • Blank and unblank mold items. • Analyze split classification.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 1

Splitting the Workpiece You can split the workpiece by using a parting surface or mold volume to create the core and cavity volumes of the mold model. • Split the workpiece using the All Wrkpcs split option. • A new mold volume is created equal to the workpiece volume. – Reference model geometry subtracted. • The volume is split into one or two volumes. – Use a parting surface or other volume. Figure 1 – Mold Model and Parting Surface

Figure 2 – Split Mold Model Core Volume

Figure 3 – Split Mold Model Cavity Volume

Splitting the Workpiece You can split or divide the workpiece with the All Wrkpcs split option by using a parting surface or a mold volume. When the workpiece split is performed, Creo Parametric calculates the total volume of the workpiece and creates a mold volume from it. The system then subtracts, or trims, the reference model geometry and any mold features such as gates, runners, and sprues from the workpiece volume and creates a Refpart Cutout feature in the model tree (this Refpart Cutout feature displays in the model tree differently than a reference part cutout operation that is performed on a mold volume). The remaining mold volume is then split at the specified parting surface or mold volume. The system trims the amount of workpiece volume to one side of the parting surface or mold volume and turns that volume into its own CREO精诚网 mold volume. If applicable, the system also trims the amount of workpiece volume on the other side of the parting surface or mold volume and turns 中国CREO技术领航者 that volume into its own mold volume. A simple mold model containing only Module 9 | Page 2

© 2011 PTC

a core and cavity is a typical example. One of the mold volumes becomes the core, and the other the cavity.

One Volume or Two? For each split operation you must determine how many resultant mold volumes are to be created by specifying one of the following options : • Two Volumes — Splits the workpiece into two mold volumes. • One Volume — Splits the workpiece into a single mold volume, discarding the other portion. You must specify which portion you want included in the mold volume. You can do this using the Island List. The Island List enables you to select which portion to include in the new volume. When you cursor over an island in the list, the corresponding geometry highlights blue in the graphics window. Regardless of how many volumes are created, the system prompts you to name each one. You can determine the volume to be created by shading it. The system hides all the other volumes at this time, and creates a mold volume with the name you specify.

Workpiece Splitting Guidelines Consider the following guidelines when splitting the workpiece: • A split operation in a mold model using the All Wrkpcs option is typically only performed one time. • Splitting a workpiece does not modify its geometry. Whenever a workpiece is split, the system copies the volume occupied by the workpiece and creates a mold volume from it. • If you split a workpiece by a parting surface, the system modifies the existing volume. That is, a volume is split and either one or two volumes are created in place of the original volume. • Splitting the workpiece with parting surfaces ensures that these solid mold components add up to the desired volume, with no extra or missing pieces. • If you split the workpiece by a parting surface, the parting surface must completely intersect the workpiece. • If you split a workpiece by another volume, the original volumes are not modified. Rather, the original volumes are copied and then split. For example, if you use the Mold Volume, Two Volumes option and split mold volume A using mold volume B, there will be a total of four mold volumes after the split: original volumes A and B, and new volumes C and D. One of the new mold volumes C or D will be identical to the splitting mold volume B. As a result, you should use the One Volume option when splitting by a mold volume. This way, when you split mold volume A with mold volume B, you end up with a total of three mold volumes: original volumes A and B, and new volume C. New volume C is equivalent to volume A minus volume B. Using the One Volume option avoids redundant volumes and keeps the number of mold volume features down in the model tree. • Name all resultant mold volumes appropriately, as this will help you CREO精诚网 determine which mold volumes to create solid mold components from later on. For example, if the mold volume will become the core mold component, 中国CREO技术领航者 name it “core_vol”. © 2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Splitting the Workpiece Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Split-Workpiece Task 1:

SPLIT-WORKPIECE.ASM

Split the mold model workpiece into volumes.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select the SPLIT-WORKPIECE_ WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice the skirt parting surface. 7. Select Volume Split from the Mold Volume types drop-down list in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group. 8. Click Two Volumes > All Wrkpcs > Done from the menu manager. 9. Notice that the workpiece has been filled with a mold volume.

10. Select the parting surface from the graphics window. 11. Click OK from the Select dialog box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 9 | Page 4

© 2011 PTC

12. Click OK from the Split dialog box. 13. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade. • Notice that the volume will be the core of the mold. • Type CORE_VOL and press ENTER.

14. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade. 15. Orient to the 3D view orientation and notice that this volume will be the cavity of the mold. 16. In the Properties dialog box, type CAVITY_VOL and press ENTER.

17. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 18. In the model tree, notice the Refpart Cutout feature. 19. Also notice the two mold volumes that were created, and their names. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 5

Splitting Mold Volumes You can also split existing mold volumes to create volumes for sliders, lifters, inserts, and so on. • Split mold volumes using the Mold Volume split option. – Specify the volume to be split in the Search Tool. • The specified volume is split into one or two volumes. – Use a parting surface or other volume. Figure 1 – Mold Model and Slider Volumes

Figure 2 – Core Volume Before it is Split for Slider Volumes

Figure 3 – Core Volume After Splits for Slider Volumes

Splitting Mold Volumes You can split an existing mold volume in a mold model using the Mold Volume split option. This option is only available if the workpiece has already been split, or if you have sketched a mold volume slider, insert, or lifter, for example. Unlike the All Wrkpces option, when a mold volume is split, the system does not create a reference part cutout in the model tree. When you specify the Mold Volume option, the system uses the Search Tool to perform a search for all quilts (mold volumes) in the mold model. You must specify the desired quilt (mold volume) to be split from the list of results found. You should not modify the parameters of the Search Tool to obtain different results. A mold model containing sliders, inserts, or lifters needs to undergo multiple split operations because multiple mold components will be created from the CREO精诚网 mold model. 中国CREO技术领航者

Module 9 | Page 6

© 2011 PTC

One Volume or Two? For each split operation you must determine how many resultant mold volumes are to be created by specifying one of the following options: • Two Volumes — Splits the mold volume into two mold volumes. • One Volume — Splits the mold volume into a single mold volume, “discarding” the other portion. You must specify which portion you want included in the mold volume. This is done using the Island List. The Island List enables you to select which portion is to be included in the new volume. When you hover over an island in the list, the corresponding geometry highlights blue in the graphics window. Regardless of how many volumes are created, the system prompts you to name each one. You can determine the volume to be created by shading it. The system hides all the other volumes at this time, and creates a mold volume with the name you specify.

Creating Intermediate Mold Volumes Depending on the mold model and its complexity, not every mold volume created will be used to create a final solid mold component. It may be necessary to create “intermediate”, or temporary mold volumes during splitting operations. For example, if you split the workpiece into the core and cavity volumes, but the core volume must further be split to remove a slider volume, you create an intermediate core volume.

Mold Volume Splitting Guidelines Consider the following guidelines when splitting mold volumes: • When you split a volume by a parting surface, the volume is split at the parting surface and either one or two volumes are created in place of the original volume. • When you split a volume by another volume, the original volumes are not modified. Rather, the original volumes are copied and then split. For example, if you use the Mold Volume, Two Volumes option and split mold volume A using mold volume B, there will be a total of four mold volumes after the split: original volumes A and B, and new volumes C and D. One of the new mold volumes C or D will be identical to the splitting mold volume B. As a result, you should use the One Volume option when splitting by a mold volume. This way, when you split mold volume A with mold volume B, you end up with a total of three mold volumes: original volumes A and B, and new volume C. New volume C is equivalent to volume A minus volume B. Using the One Volume option avoids redundant volumes and keeps the number of mold volume features down in the model tree. • When you split the mold volume by a parting surface, the parting surface must completely intersect the mold volume. • Name all resultant mold volumes appropriately, as this will help you determine which mold volumes to create solid mold components from later on. For example, if a mold volume is used as an intermediate mold volume, CREO精诚网 name it “temp_mold_vol1”, or something similar so you know later on that it will not be used to create a solid mold component. 中国CREO技术领航者

© 2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Splitting Mold Volumes Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Split-Volumes Task 1:

SPLIT-VOLUMES.ASM

Split the workpiece and mold volumes of a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select the SPLIT-VOLUMES_ WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice the skirt parting surface and the two slider mold volumes in the graphics window and model tree. 7. Select Volume Split from the Mold Volume types drop-down list in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group. 8. Click Two Volumes > All Wrkpcs > Done from the menu manager. 9. Notice that the workpiece has been filled with a mold volume. 10. Select the parting surface from the graphics window and click OK from the Select dialog box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 9 | Page 8

© 2011 PTC

11. Click OK from the Split dialog box. 12. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade. 13. Click Wireframe Graphics toolbar.

from the In

14. Notice that the volume will be the core of the mold, but that it has not taken the slider volumes into account. 15. In the Properties dialog box type TEMP-CORE_VOL1 and press ENTER. 16. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade. 17. Spin the model and notice that this volume will be the cavity of the mold. 18. In the Properties dialog box, type CAVITY_VOL and press ENTER. 19. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 20. In the model tree, right-click SPLIT ID 7286 [CAVITY_VOL-MOLD VOLUME] and select Hide. 21. Click Volume Split and click One Volume > Mold Volume > Done from the menu manager. 22. In the Search Tool, select the TEMP-CORE_VOL1 quilt and click Add Item . • Click Close. 23. Query-select the front slider volume and click OK from the Select dialog box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 9

24. In the menu manager, select the Island 1 check box and click Done Sel. 25. Click OK from the Split dialog box.

26. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade and notice the slider volume has been trimmed from the temporary core volume. • Type TEMP-CORE_VOL2 and press ENTER.

27. Click Volume Split and click One Volume > Mold Volume > Done. 28. In the Search Tool, select the TEMP-CORE_VOL2 quilt and click Add Item . • Click Close. 29. Query-select the rear slider volume and click OK from the Select dialog box. 30. In the menu manager, select the Island 1 check box and click Done Sel. 31. Click OK from the Split dialog box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 9 | Page 10

© 2011 PTC

32. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade and notice that the slider volume has been trimmed from the final core volume. • Type CORE_VOL and press ENTER.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 11

Splitting Volumes using Multiple Parting Surfaces You can use multiple parting surfaces to split a workpiece or mold volume. • You can use multiple parting surfaces in a single split operation. • You can use multiple parting surfaces in multiple split operations. Figure 1 – Model Tree Containing Two Parting Surfaces

Figure 2 – Selecting Multiple Parting Surfaces

Figure 3 – Viewing Multiple Parting Surfaces

Splitting Volumes using Multiple Parting Surfaces You can use multiple parting surfaces to split volumes in two different ways: • You can use multiple parting surfaces to split a workpiece or mold volume into multiple mold volumes. You can use one parting surface for one split operation, and specify a different parting surface for a second split operation. Of course you must also specify the workpiece or mold volume to split and the names of the first and, if applicable, second volumes. • Sometimes the shape of the reference model and the parting surfaces created require that you specify more than one parting surface during a single split operation. In these circumstances, you can press CTRL in order to select multiple parting surfaces. You can also select multiple mold volumes to split a workpiece or mold volume in a split operation.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 9 | Page 12

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Splitting Volumes using Multiple Parting Surfaces Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Split-Volumes_Multiple Task 1:

MULT-SURF1.ASM

Split a volume using multiple parting surfaces in one split.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select the MULT-SURF1_WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice that there are two parting surfaces, SKIRT_PART-SURF and MANUAL_PART-SURF. 7. Select Volume Split from the Mold Volume types drop-down list in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group. 8. Click Two Volumes > All Wrkpcs > Done from the menu manager. 9. Press CTRL, select the two parting surfaces, and click OK from the Select dialog box. 10. Click OK from the Split dialog box. 11. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type CORE_VOL, and press ENTER.

12. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type CAVITY_VOL, and press ENTER.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 13

Task 2:

Split volumes with multiple parting surfaces in two split operations.

1. Click Open

and double-click MULT-SURF2.ASM.

2. Select the MULT-SURF2_WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice the two parting surfaces MAIN_PART_SURF and SIDE_PART_SURF. 7. Click Volume Split

.

8. Click Two Volumes > All Wrkpcs > Done from the menu manager. 9. Select the SIDE_PART_SURF and click OK from the Select dialog box. 10. Click OK from the Split dialog box. 11. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type TEMP-MOLD_VOL, and press ENTER.

12. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type SLIDER_VOL, and press ENTER.

13. Click Volume Split and click Two Volumes > Mold Volume > Done. 14. In the Search Tool dialog box, select TEMP-MOLD_VOL, click Add Item , and click Close. 15. Query-select the MAIN_PART_SURF and click CREO精诚网 OK from the Select dialog box.

中国CREO技术领航者 Module 9 | Page 14

© 2011 PTC

16. Click OK from the Split dialog box. 17. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type CORE_VOL, and press ENTER. 18. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type CAVITY_VOL, and press ENTER.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 15

Blanking and Unblanking Mold Items The Blank and Unblank options enable you to add or remove mold items to the current mold model display. • Use these options at any time while in Mold mode. • You can blank and unblank the following: – Parting Surface – Volume – Component • Use the following methods: – Blank-Unblank Dialog Box – Right-click after item selection.

Figure 1 – Blank-Unblank Dialog Boxes

Blanking and Unblanking Mold Items You can blank and unblank mold items at any time during your work in Mold mode. Blank and unblank functionality is similar to hide and unhide functionality. However, unlike the hide-unhide functionality, you do not have to save the blank-unblank status. It is retained for you automatically. Additionally, when a mold item is comprised of multiple features, such as a manually created parting surface, you can blank or unblank the entire parting surface in one operation, rather than having to hide or unhide individual features. The following items can be blanked and unblanked: — Enables you to blank/unblank any parting surface in • Parting Surface the mold model. — Enables you to blank/unblank any mold volume, such as • Volume sliders, cores, and cavities. — Enables you to blank/unblank the reference model, • Component workpiece, or any other mold component. You can see the status of any mold item in the model tree at any time by adding the Status column to the model tree column display. You can blank and unblank mold items using the following methods:

CREO精诚网

• 中国CREO技术领航者 Click Mold Display , in the View tab, to access the Blank-Unblank dialog box. You can also press CTRL+B to access the dialog box. The Module 9 | Page 16

© 2011 PTC

Filter Tree in the dialog box enables you to see only the mold item types you want to blank or unblank. You can filter by parting surfaces, volumes, or components. If you click Parting Surface , for example, you will see only the parting surfaces available for selection in the dialog box. When a Component filter option is activated, a series of check boxes becomes available, enabling you to further filter the components displayed in the Blank-Unblank dialog box. The following component items can further be filtered: – Workpiece

– Ref Model

– Mold Component

– Mold Base Comp

– Gen Assembly

– Molding

The Blank-Unblank dialog box contains a Blank and Unblank tab. Items listed in the Blank tab are those that are visible in the graphics window but available for blanking. If you select an item and click Blank, the item is moved to the Unblank tab of the dialog box. Similarly, the Unblank tab displays all items that are blanked in the graphics window. • Select items from the model tree, then right-click and select Blank or Unblank. If the mold item is comprised of numerous features, which can occur for a mold volume or manually created parting surfaces, you must select the first feature to blank or unblank the item. The Blank and Unblank menu selection is only available for the first feature of the mold item. • Select items from the graphics window, then right-click and select Blank or Unblank.

Blanking and Unblanking Requirements Consider the following blanking and unblanking criteria for items in a mold model: • When splitting the workpiece or mold volume, the parting surface or mold volume used to do the splitting must be unblanked. • In order to split the workpiece, it must be unblanked. If the workpiece is blanked, the All Wrkpcs split option is grayed out in the menu manager.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Blanking and Unblanking Mold Items Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Blank-Unblank Task 1:

BLANK-UNBLANK.ASM

Blank and unblank mold items using the Blank-Unblank dialog box.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 3. Click Mold Display

from the Visibility group.

4. Select the Mold tab. You can also press CTRL+B to access the Blank-Unblank dialog box. 5. In the Blank-Unblank dialog box, select Component as the Filter if necessary. • Press CTRL and select BLANK-UNBLANK_REF and BLANK-UNBLANK_WRK. • Click Blank.

6. In the Blank-Unblank dialog box, as the Filter. select Volume • Select CAVITY_VOL and click Blank.

7. In the Blank-Unblank dialog box, select CORE_VOL and click Blank.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 9 | Page 18

© 2011 PTC

8. In the Blank-Unblank dialog box, select Parting Surface as the Filter. • Select MAIN_PART_SURF and click Blank.

9. In the Blank-Unblank dialog box, select the Unblank tab. as the • Select Component Filter. • Select BLANK-UNBLANK_ REF and click Unblank. • Click Close. Task 2:

Blank and unblank mold items from the model tree and graphics window.

1. In the model tree, right-click SLIDER_VOL and select Blank. 2. Click Repaint all geometry.

and de-select

3. In the graphics window select the side parting surface, right-click, and select Blank. 4. Click Repaint

.

5. In the model tree, right-click CORE_VOL and select Unblank. 6. Click Repaint all geometry.

and de-select

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 19

7. In the model tree, right-click BLANK-UNBLANK_REF.PRT and select Blank.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 9 | Page 20

© 2011 PTC

Analyzing Split Classification The process of determining which individual closed islands of space should be included in the resultant mold volume is called classifying. • An island is a closed volume of space in the mold model. • Specify the islands to be included in the resultant volume. • Classifying islands enables you to create simpler manual parting surfaces.

Figure 1 – Viewing Reference Part Geometry

Figure 2 – Classifying Islands

Figure 3 – Resultant Mold Volume

Analyzing Split Classification When you split a volume, depending upon the shape of the workpiece, the shape of the reference model, and the shape of the parting surface, the split may create several individual closed volumes. When you create a split using the Two Volumes option, each of these volumes must end up as part of one volume or the other. Similarly, when you create a split using the One Volume option, each of these volumes must end up as part of the new volume, or left to remain in the old volume. Each one of these individual closed volumes occupies an island of space within the mold model. You must specify which islands of space should belong together, or be included, in the resultant mold volume. The process of determining which islands should be included in the resultant mold volume is called classifying. Each of the islands displays in the menu manager Island List. When you CREO精诚网 hover over a given island in the menu manager, its corresponding volume of space highlights in blue in the graphics window, as shown in Figure 2. 中国CREO技术领航者 Each of the islands you select from the Island List are included together © 2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 21

to comprise the resultant mold volume. The islands that are not selected either end up in the other mold volume (in the case of a Two Volumes split) or discarded (in the case of a One Volume split). A One Volume split always creates a situation where you must classify the islands to be included in the resultant volume. The reason for this is that regardless of whether you split by a parting surface or by another volume, you must specify which side of the split you want to be included in the resultant volume. You also must classify islands when you specify multiple parting surfaces or mold volumes when splitting a volume. Classifying islands in a mold model enables you to create simpler manual parting surfaces. In Figure 1, a flat parting surface was used to create the slider mold volume shown in Figure 3. This was done by classifying the islands properly, as shown in Figure 2. Rather than creating a flat parting surface, you can create a parting surface which completely conforms to the interior of all the cuts in the reference model. You can then split the workpiece using this more complex parting surface and not have to classify islands. The parting surface would look like this:

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 9 | Page 22

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Split Classification Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Split_Classification Task 1:

SPLIT-CLASSIFICATION.ASM

Classify islands to split mold volumes correctly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select the SPLITCLASSIFICATION_WRK.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Wireframe. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice the three cuts in the side of the reference model. 7. In the model tree, right-click SLIDER_PARTING-SURF and select Unblank. 8. Select Volume Split from the Mold Volume types drop-down list in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group. 9. Click Two Volumes > All Wrkpcs > Done from the menu manager. 10. Select the parting surface from the graphics window. 11. Click OK from the Select dialog box. 12. In the menu manager, cursor over Island 1 and notice the corresponding space the island occupies highlighted blue. • Select the Island 1 check box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 23

13. In the menu manager, select the Island 3, Island 4, and Island 5 check boxes. • Click Done Sel. 14. Click OK from the Split dialog box. 15. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade and spin the model to inspect the mold volume. • Type SLIDER_VOL and press ENTER. 16. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 17. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type TEMP-MOLD_VOL, and press ENTER.

18. Click Volume Split

.

19. Click Two Volumes > Mold Volume > Done. 20. In the Search Tool, select the TEMP-MOLD_VOL quilt and click Add Item . • Click Close. 21. In the model tree, right-click CORE-CAVITY_PARTINGSURF and select Unblank. 22. Query-select the parting surface and click OK from the Select dialog box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 9 | Page 24

© 2011 PTC

23. In the menu manager, select the Island 1, Island 3, and Island 4 check boxes, and click Done Sel. 24. Click OK from the Split dialog box. 25. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade and spin the model to inspect the mold volume. • Type CAVITY_VOL and press ENTER. 26. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 27. In the Properties dialog box, click Shade, type CORE_VOL and press ENTER.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 9 | Page 25

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 9 | Page 26

© 2011 PTC

Module

10

Mold Component Extraction Module Overview Once the proper mold volumes have been created and split, you can now create the mold components. You create mold components by filling the mold volumes with material. This process is called extracting, and it automatically converts the mold volumes into fully functional solid parts. In this module, you learn how to extract the final solid mold components from mold volumes.

Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to: • Extract mold components from mold volumes. • Apply start models to mold components.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 10 | Page 1

Extracting Mold Components from Volumes You can produce mold components by filling the previously defined mold volumes with solid material. • Mold component features: – Contain an Extract feature. – Are fully-functional parts. – Maintain a parent/child relationship with their mold volumes. • Mold component color-coding: – Reference model color – Blue – Orange

Figure 2 – Extracted Cavity Mold Component

Figure 1 – Extracted Core Mold Component

Figure 3 – Extracted Slider Mold Component

Extracting Mold Components from Volumes Once the mold volumes are created and the workpiece and mold volumes are split, you can create the final mold components. You can produce mold components by filling the previously defined mold volumes with solid material. This process, performed using the Cavity insert option, is called extracting. Extracted parts can be core and cavity pieces as well as sliders, inserts, core pins, and so on. The system does not automatically create mold components from every mold volume found in the mold model. Recall that you may have created temporary mold volumes during the split process in order to create your desired mold volumes. Consequently, you must specify which mold volumes will be extracted into mold components. When the mold components are extracted and created, the corresponding mold volumes are automatically blankedCREO精诚网 from the graphics window. The extracted mold components are created in the mold model, and each 中国CREO技术领航者 component contains an Extract feature that contains the solid geometry. Module 10 | Page 2

© 2011 PTC

The extract feature cannot be redefined, but these components are fully functional parts. You can retrieve them in Part mode, and add new features to them. To save the extracted mold components, you must save the mold model before erasing it from memory or exiting your current Creo Parametric session. By default, the extracted mold components are named the same as the volumes from which they were extracted. Extracted mold components maintain a parent/child relationship with their mold volumes. Therefore, the mold components automatically update when changes are made to the mold volumes. While the mold volumes are assembly features in the mold model, the mold components are assembly components in the mold model.

Color-Coding of Extracted Mold Components By default, the extracted mold components are created in the default Creo Parametric gray color. However, the surfaces of the extracted mold components may also display in three other potential colors: • Reference model color — The mold components surfaces that touch the reference model are color-coded the same as the reference model. In the figures, the reference model color is red. • Blue — Steel-to-steel contact between tooling component shutoffs. • Orange — Steel-to-steel contact between slider mold component surfaces and mold plates, cores, or cavities. It is important to note that only the slider mold volumes created by calculating undercut boundaries become orange when the mold components are extracted. Sketched sliders and other components have blue surfaces at their steel-to-steel contact points.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 10 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Extracting Mold Components from Volumes Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Components_Extract-Volume Task 1:

EXTRACT-VOLUMES.ASM

Extract mold components from mold volumes.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden from the Display Style types drop-down menu and notice that the mold volumes are surfaces. from the 3. Select Shading Display Style types drop-down menu.

4. Select Cavity insert from the Mold Component types drop-down menu in the Components group. 5. In the Create Mold Component dialog box, click Select All • Press CTRL and click TEMP-MOLD_VOL1 to de-select it.

.

6. Click OK from the Create Mold Component dialog box. 7. Notice the four new mold components created in the model tree. 8. Select No Hidden from the Display Style types drop-down menu and notice that the mold components are solid geometry. from the 9. Select Shading Display Style types drop-down menu.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 10 | Page 4

© 2011 PTC

10. In the model tree, right-click CORE_VOL.PRT and select Open. 11. Notice the single Extract feature in the model tree. 12. Spin the model to inspect it and notice the surfaces that are blue. 13. Notice the surfaces that are orange. 14. Notice the surfaces that are reference model color. 15. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to return to the mold model. 16. In the model tree, right-click CAVITY_VOL.PRT and select Open. 17. Again, notice the single Extract feature in the model tree. 18. Spin the model to inspect it and again notice the surfaces that are blue. 19. Notice the surfaces that are reference model color. 20. Click Close mold model.

to return to the

21. In the model tree, right-click SLIDER_VOL1.PRT and select Open. 22. Notice the orange surfaces. 23. Click Close mold model.

to return to the

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 10 | Page 5

Applying Start Models to Mold Components You can rename extracted mold components and apply start models to them. • Benefits of using templates: – Datums – Layers – Parameters – View Orientations • Because each mold component is a part model, it should be renamed accordingly.

Figure 1 – Extracted Mold Component Model Tree

Figure 2 – Renaming Mold Components and Applying Start Model

Applying Start Models to Mold Components You can apply an existing start model template to components when extracting them from mold volumes in the mold model. This is done in the Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box. As a best practice, you should create extracted mold components using a start model template. Using a start model template when extracting mold components provides you with the following benefits. • Datums — Includes a set of default datum planes and default coordinate system. • Layers • Parameters • View Orientations These are the same benefits that you gain from using a start model template when creating new part models.

Renaming Mold Components By default, extracted mold components are named the same as the mold volume from which they are extracted. You can rename the mold component name in the Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box. This section displays the specified mold volumes that you extract. In one columnCREO精诚网 the mold volume name is displayed, and in another column the corresponding mold component name is displayed. As a best practice you 中国CREO技术领航者 should rename the mold components with names that are unique to the mold Module 10 | Page 6

© 2011 PTC

and to the type of component being extracted. For example, a mold volume named cavity_vol should have its corresponding mold component renamed to widget_cavity, or it should be renamed according to your company's standards. Extracted mold components are not volumes, so the “vol” suffix should be removed. Also, mold components are part models. As such, each part model should be given a unique name. You can only rename one mold component at a time. If more than one mold component is selected in the Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box, the fields to rename mold components become grayed out.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 10 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Applying Start Models to Mold Components Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Components_Start-Model Task 1:

APPLY_START-MODEL.ASM

Rename mold components prior to extracting them.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Cavity insert from the Mold Component types drop-down menu in the Components group. 3. In the Create Mold Component . dialog box, click Select All • Click Advanced to expand it. • Notice that the mold volumes and corresponding mold component names are the same. 4. In the Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box, select mold volume CAVITY_VOL. • Edit the Mold Component Name to WIDGET_CAVITY and press ENTER. • Select mold volume CORE_VOL. • Edit the Mold Component Name to WIDGET_CORE and press ENTER. • Select mold volume SLIDER_VOL. • Edit the Mold Component Name to WIDGET_SLIDER and press ENTER.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 10 | Page 8

© 2011 PTC

Task 2:

Apply a start model to the mold components and extract them.

1. In the Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box, click Select All

.

• Click Copy From . • In the Choose Template dialog box, double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT. • Notice that the Copy From field displays the template model that is used. 2. Click OK from the Create Mold Component dialog box. 3. Notice the three newly created mold components in the model tree. 4. In the model tree, right-click WIDGET_SLIDER.PRT and select Open. 5. In the model tree, notice the datum features in addition to the Extract feature. 6. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Named Views select BACK.

and

7. In the model tree, click Show and then click Layer Tree. 8. Notice the default layers. 9. Click Show Model Tree.

and then click

from the Quick 10. Click Close Access toolbar to return to the mold model. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 10 | Page 9

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 10 | Page 10

© 2011 PTC

Module

11

Mold Features Creation Module Overview You can create assembly-level features in a mold model for the purpose of removing material. Mold features include waterlines, runners, ejector pin clearance holes, and gates. You can use user-defined features (UDFs) to define and place waterlines, runners, and gates. You can also run a waterlines check for clearance of waterline circuits in the mold model.

Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to: • Create waterline circuits. • Analyze waterline end conditions. • Perform a waterlines check. • Create sprues and runners. • Create ejector pin clearance holes. • Create and place UDFs in a mold model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 1

Creating Waterline Circuits Waterlines are assembly-level features that you can use to create water channels in the mold model. • Specify the waterline circuit diameter. • Sketch the waterline circuit. – Section should contain only linear entities. • Specify the mold components to be cut. Figure 1 – Sketching the Waterline Circuit

Figure 2 – Completed Waterline

Figure 3 – Cutaway of Waterline Circuit

Creating Waterline Circuits Waterlines are assembly-level features that you can use to create water channels or circuits in the mold model. Waterlines are drilled holes in the mold model components. The waterline circuits convey cooling water through the mold components to control the cooling of molten material. The speed of cooling the mold is directly related to the profitability of the entire mold product line. To create a waterline circuit, you must specify the following: • Name — Determines the name of the waterline as it displays in the model tree. You can accept the default name if desired. • Diameter — Enables you to specify the diameter of the waterline hole. You can either type a value or accept the default diameter value. • Circuit — Enables you to sketch the waterline circuit path. You must specify the sketch plane and reference plane and orientation. The sketched section should only contain linear entities. This is because the waterline path is ultimately drilled into the mold components. As you sketch the CREO精诚网 circuit in Sketcher, a dashed line displays on either side of the sketch line, as shown in Figure 1. This dashed line denotes the actual section diameter 中国CREO技术领航者 of the circuit. Module 11 | Page 2

© 2011 PTC

• Intersected Parts — Enables you to select the mold components that the waterline circuit intersects. The following options are available for determining which components are going to be intersected, or cut, by the waterline: – Automatic Update — When this check box is selected, the system automatically determines which mold components are cut by the waterline feature. All other selection options become grayed out. When this option is used, the automatic intersection excludes the reference models and any molding. – Advanced Intersection — When this check box is selected, the system enables you to manually define the display level separately for each component. – Select a component to intersect — Enables you to manually specify which components are cut by the waterline feature. – AutoAdd — Similar to the Automatic Update check box, when this option is selected, the system automatically determines which mold components are cut by the waterline feature. – Info — Enables you to display information regarding the waterlines feature in the browser. The mold components that are specified display in the Intersected Comps dialog box. To remove any components displayed, you can select the component and either click Remove, or right-click and select Remove. By default, even though the waterline is created as an assembly feature, you can also view it within the individual mold component. The feature displays in the mold component model tree as an assembly cut. You can modify this behavior, however. The right column of the Intersected Comps dialog box displays the visibility level for each intersected component which, by default, is the mold component itself. You can click in this field and modify the visibility level of the component to the mold model assembly. When this change is made the waterline is only visible from within the mold model, and not within the individual mold component. Because waterlines are actually drilled holes in the mold components, the end of each waterline segment displays as a drill point, rather than a flat or rounded edge. You can create waterlines any time after the workpiece and reference model are assembled. When the volumes are split, any previously created waterlines are automatically subtracted from the mold volumes along with the reference model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating Waterline Circuits Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Waterlines Task 1:

WATERLINES.ASM

Create a basic waterline circuit in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Click Water Line from the Production Features group. 3. Type 8 as the diameter of the waterline circuit and press ENTER. 4. Select datum plane WLINE as the waterline sketching plane and click Default from the menu manager. 5. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar.

from the

6. Click References from the Setup group and select the bottom of the mold component. • Click Close. 7. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 8. Click Line Chain the three lines.

and sketch

9. Middle-click twice and edit the dimensions, as shown. 10. Click OK

.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 11 | Page 4

© 2011 PTC

11. Orient to the Standard Orientation. .

12. Disable Plane Display

13. In the Intersected Comps dialog box, select the Automatic Update check box. • Click OK. 14. Click OK from the Water Line dialog box. 15. Notice the waterline feature in the model tree. 16. At the top of the model tree, click and select Tree Settings Filters. • In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed Objects check box and click OK. 17. In the model tree, right-click CUT and select Resume. 18. De-select all geometry and zoom in on the waterline. 19. Right-click WATERLINE_1 and select Edit. 20. Edit the diameter from 8 to 10 and click Regenerate

.

21. Right-click WLINE_CAVITY.PRT and select Open. 22. Notice the assembly cuts in the model tree. One of the assembly cuts is for the cutaway, and the other is for the waterline. 23. Click Close

.

CREO精诚网 This completes the procedure. 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 5

Analyzing Waterline End Conditions You can apply optional end conditions to the waterline circuit segment endpoints. • The following end conditions can be applied: – None – Blind – Thru – Thru w/Cbore

Figure 1 – Blind Waterline End Condition

Figure 2 – Thru w/Cbore Waterline End Condition

Figure 3 – Thru Waterline End Condition

Analyzing Waterline End Conditions You can apply optional end conditions to the waterline circuit segment endpoints. You can apply end conditions to ensure the circuit is capable of being manufactured. You can apply the following end conditions: • None — Causes a standard, blind end to be created on the end. By default, each waterline circuit end has this option specified. • Blind — Enables you to specify an extra drilled blind end. You can extend the drilled end a specified distance beyond the endpoint. • Thru — Enables you to create a straight hole end condition. The system extends the drilled end out through all mold model geometry. • Thru w/Cbore — Enables you to create a counterbore hole end condition. Similar to the Thru option, the system extends the drilled end out through all mold model geometry. However, the system also places a counterbore at the entrance to the mold geometry. You can specify both the counterbore diameter and depth. In orderCREO精诚网 to define a waterline circuit end condition, you must specify the ends to中国CREO技术领航者 which you want to apply end conditions. Rather than selecting a segment endpoint vertex, you should select the segment itself near the end to which Module 11 | Page 6

© 2011 PTC

you want to apply the end condition. If the endpoint you want to apply the condition to is the intersection of two segments, the system determines which segment endpoint to apply the end condition to based on the segment you select. You can press CTRL and select multiple waterline circuit endpoints in order to have the same end condition applied.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Water Line End Conditions Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Waterlines_End Task 1:

END-CONDITIONS.ASM

Add various end conditions to a waterline in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of WATERLINE_1. 3. In the Water Line dialog box, double-click End Condition. 4. Select the front end of the left waterline segment and click OK from the Select dialog box. 5. In the menu manager, click Thru w/Cbore > Done/Return. 6. Type 12 for the counterbore diameter and press ENTER. 7. Type 15 for the counterbore depth and press ENTER.

8. Select the left side of the rear waterline segment and click OK from the Select dialog box.

9. In the menu manager, click Blind > Done/Return. 10. Type 8 as the value to extend the left side and press ENTER.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 11 | Page 8

© 2011 PTC

11. Select the right side of the rear waterline segment and click OK from the Select dialog box.

12. In the menu manager, click Thru > Done/Return.

13. Click Done/Return from the menu manager. 14. Click OK from the Water Line dialog box. 15. At the top of the model tree, click and select Tree Settings Filters. • In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed Objects check box and click OK. 16. In the model tree, right-click CUT and select Resume. 17. De-select all geometry. 18. Spin the model and inspect the waterline. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 9

Performing a Waterlines Check The waterlines check helps to ensure that the waterlines are not too close to the external surfaces of the mold model. • To perform a waterlines check, you must specify: – Part – Waterline – Minimum Clearance • Color-coded results: – Magenta — Areas within minimum clearance. – Green — Areas outside minimum clearance. Figure 1 – Waterlines Check Results

Figure 2 – Waterlines within Minimum Clearance

Performing a Waterlines Check You can perform a clearance check for waterline circuits by selecting the Waterlines option from the analysis Type drop-down list in the Mold Analysis dialog box. The waterlines check helps to ensure that the waterlines are not too close to the external surfaces of the mold model. To perform the waterlines check, you must specify the following: • Part — Enables you to specify the part whose external surfaces are used for measuring the minimum clearance. You cannot specify the reference model as the part. • Waterline — Enables you to specify which waterlines to analyze. Options CREO精诚网 include: 中国CREO技术领航者 – All Waterlines — All waterlines in the mold model are analyzed. Module 11 | Page 10

© 2011 PTC

– Select Waterlines — Enables you to specify which waterlines are analyzed. – Select Surfaces — Enables you to specify a surface of the mold component to be analyzed against the waterlines and the other external surfaces of the mold component. • Minimum Clearance — Enables you to specify the minimum clearance the waterlines must be from the external surfaces of the specified part.

Understanding Waterlines Check Results The results of the waterlines check are color-coded into two categories: • Magenta — All areas of the waterlines highlighted in magenta are less than the minimum clearance specified. • Green — All areas of the waterlines highlighted in green are greater than or equal to the minimum clearance specified.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 11

PROCEDURE - Performing a Waterlines Check Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Waterlines_Check Task 1:

WATERLINES-CHECK.ASM

Perform a waterlines check on waterline circuits in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Press CTRL and select WLINECHECK_CAVITY.PRT and WLINE-CHECK_SLIDER.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Compenent Display Style > Transparent. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice the waterlines circuits in the cavity and slider mold components. 7. Click Mold Analysis Analysis group.

from the

8. In the Mold Analysis dialog box, select Waterlines from the Type drop-down list if necessary. • Click Select Part and select WLINE-CHECK_CAVITY. PRT. • Type 8 as the Minimum Clearance and press ENTER. • Click Compute. 9. Click Repaint

.

10. Notice that only the outer ends of the waterline circuit fall inside of the minimum clearance specified.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 11 | Page 12

© 2011 PTC

11. In the Mold Analysis dialog box, edit the Minimum Clearance to 10 and click Compute. 12. Notice that only the counterbore falls within the minimum clearance specified.

13. In the Mold Analysis dialog box, and select click Select Part WLINE-CHECK_SLIDER.PRT. • Edit the Minimum Clearance to 6 and click Compute. 14. Click Repaint

.

15. Notice that it appears the waterline circuit is properly designed.

16. Zoom in on the waterlines circuit and spin the model. 17. Notice that the waterlines circuit is too close to the inner surface of the mold component. 18. Click Close from the Mold Analysis dialog box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 13

19. Orient to the WLINES view orientation. 20. In the model tree, right-click WATERLINE_SLIDER and select Edit. 21. Edit the waterline circuit diameter to 6 and click Regenerate

22. Click Mold Analysis Analysis group.

.

from the

• Click Select Part and select WLINE-CHECK_SLIDER. PRT. • Edit the Minimum Clearance to 6 and click Compute. 23. Click Repaint

.

24. Zoom in on the waterline and spin the model. 25. Notice that the waterline circuit now properly falls outside of the minimum clearance specified. 26. Click Close from the Mold Analysis dialog box. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 11 | Page 14

© 2011 PTC

Creating Sprues and Runners You can create sprues, runners, and gates to channel molten plastic into the mold cavity. • Create sprues using sketch-based features. • Create runners and sometimes gates using the Runner feature. • Section shapes include: – Round – Half Round – Hexagon – Trapezoid – Round Trapezoid Figure 1 – Cavity Showing Sprue, Runners, and Gates

Figure 2 – Core Showing Runners and Gates

Creating Sprues A sprue is the channel through which molten plastic is injected into the mold. The sprue should be as short as possible to minimize material usage. Typically, the sprue is tapered to ensure proper ejection from the mold cavity. You can create sprues in the mold model using sketch-based features such as extrudes, revolve, sweeps, and blends.

Creating Runners and Gates You can create runners and gates in the mold model to transfer material from the sprue to the mold cavity. The runner is the channel that guides the molten plastic from the sprue into the mold cavity, and the gate is the restricted entrance from the runner into the mold cavity that helps to simplify theCREO精诚网 removal of the final molded parts from the runners.

You can use the Runner feature to create the runners in your mold model. 中国CREO技术领航者

Depending upon the shape of your gates, you can also use the runner feature © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 15

to create them, or you can create them using sketch-based features such as extrudes, revolves, sweeps, and blends. You can create runners by sweeping a sketched section along a path or trajectory. The following section shapes are available, and the dimensions that define the shapes are shown: • Round — Assigns a circle to the runner's cross-section. • Half Round — Assigns a half circle to the runner's cross-section.

• Hexagon — Assigns a six-sided polygon to the runner's cross-section.

• Trapezoid — Assigns a quadrilateral to the runner's cross-section. • Round Trapezoid — Assigns a trapezoid with an arc base to the runner's cross-section.

In addition to the shape, you must define the following items: • Name — Enables you to specify the name of the Runner feature in the model tree to be different than the default name applied by the system. • Def Size — Enables you to specify the default size values for each of the runner cross-section dimensions. The dimensions that you are prompted to specify depend on the section shape specified. • Flow Path — Enables you to either select or sketch the flow path for the runner. If you select the flow path, you can select datum curves as the flow path. If you sketch the flow path, you must specify the sketch plane and reference plane and orientation. As you sketch the flow path in Sketcher, a dashed line displays on either side of the sketch line. This dashed line denotes the actual section diameter of the runner. • Direction — Specifies the direction of runner creation. • Intsct Parts — Enables you to select the mold components which the runner intersects or cuts through. The same options available in the Intersected Components dialog box for waterlines and ejector pin holes are also available for runners. Optionally, the Segment Sizes option enables you to define runners with segments of varying size within the same runner feature. When you specify a runner segment that you want to be of different size than the default CREO精诚网 size, the system prompts you to specify new dimensions to define the cross-section. Note that the runner shape specified cannot be changed for 中国CREO技术领航者 individual segments. Module 11 | Page 16

© 2011 PTC

You can create sprues and runners any time after the workpiece and reference model are assembled. When the volumes are split, any previously created sprues, runners, and gates are automatically subtracted from the mold volumes along with the reference model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Creating Sprues and Runners Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Sprue_Runner Task 1:

SPRUE-RUNNER.ASM

Create the main runner.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Select PUCK_CAVITY.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Transparent. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice the 4 cavity mold model. 7. Select the SPRUE feature already created in the mold model. 8. Click Runner from the Production Features group. 9. Click Hexagon from the menu manager. 10. Type 10 as the runner width and press ENTER. 11. Select datum plane MAIN_PARTING_PLN as the sketching plane and click Okay > Default from the menu manager. 12. Click Centerline from the Centerline types drop-down menu and sketch a centerline on the horizontal reference. 13. Sketch and dimension the line, as shown. 14. Click OK

.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 11 | Page 18

© 2011 PTC

15. Press CTRL, select the PUCK_CAVITY.PRT and PUCK_CORE.PRT, and click OK from the Intersected Comps dialog box. 16. In the Runner dialog box, double-click Name, edit the Name to MAIN_RUNNER, and press ENTER. • Click OK. Task 2:

Create the secondary runners and gates.

1. Click Runner

and click Round from the menu manager.

2. Type 4 as the runner diameter and press ENTER. 3. Click Use Prev > Okay from the menu manager. 4. Click References and query-select datum plane FRONT of the upper-right reference model as well as its left edge. • Click Close. 5. Click Centerline and sketch a centerline on both the vertical and original horizontal references. 6. Sketch and dimension the line, as shown.

7. Sketch and dimension the two smaller lines, as shown.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 19

8. Drag a window around the three lines. from the Editing 9. Click Mirror group and select the horizontal centerline. 10. Click OK

.

11. Press CTRL, select the PUCK_CAVITY.PRT and PUCK_CORE.PRT, and click OK from the Intersected Comps dialog box. 12. Click Repaint

.

13. In the Runner dialog box, double-click Name, edit the Name to SECONDARY_RUNNER, and press ENTER. • Click Preview. 14. In the Runner dialog box, double-click Segment Sizes. • Press CTRL, select the four smaller segments, and click Done/Return from the menu manager. • Type 2 as the runner segment diameter and press ENTER. • Click Done.

15. Click OK from the Runner dialog box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 11 | Page 20

© 2011 PTC

16. In the model tree, right-click PUCK_CAVITY.PRT and select Open. 17. Spin the model and observe the sprue, runners, and gates.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 21

Creating Ejector Pin Clearance Holes Ejector pin clearance holes are created in mold components so that ejector pins can pass through and push the molded part out. • Ejector pin holes are similar to conventional holes. – You can specify a different diameter through each intersected component. • Available types: – Linear – Radial – Coaxial – On Point Figure 1 – Completed Ejector Pin Holes

Figure 2 – Viewing Ejector Pin Holes in Core

Creating Ejector Pin Clearance Holes The ejector pin clearance hole is a hole feature that is only available in Mold mode. Ejector pin clearance holes are created in the mold components so that ejector pins can pass through and push the molded part out. An ejector pin clearance hole is very similar to the conventional hole feature except that you can specify a different diameter through each component that the hole intersects in the mold model. An ejector pin hole is created as an assembly feature in the mold model. You can create the following types of ejector pin clearance holes: • Linear — Enables you to create an ejector pin hole on a selected reference, offset linearly from two references. • Radial — Enables you to create an ejector pin hole on a selected reference, at a radial offset from an axis, and at an angle from a plane. When you specify a radial hole type and select the axis, you can specify the radial offset in the following ways: – Diameter — Places the hole with a diameter dimension for the offset. CREO精诚网 – Radius — Places the hole with a radius dimension for the offset. 中国CREO技术领航者 – Linear — Places the hole with a linear dimension for the offset. Module 11 | Page 22

© 2011 PTC

• Coaxial — Enables you to create an ejector pin hole on a selected reference, through a selected datum axis. If ejector pins are already assembled in the mold model, then you can use the coaxial hole to easily place the ejector pin clearance holes. You can also use the axes created for the ejector pin pads created in the reference model. • On Point — Enables you to create an ejector pin hole through a specified datum point. If there are several datum points in the mold model where the holes should be placed, you can simultaneously place holes at each point within the same hole feature. Once the ejector pin hole type and placement references have been defined, you must specify the following options: • Direction — Determines the direction of hole creation. You can flip the direction. • Intersected Parts — Enables you to select the mold components that the ejector clearance hole intersects. The following options are available for determining which components are going to be intersected, or cut, by the ejector pin: – Auto Update Intrscts — When this check box is selected, the system automatically determines which mold components are cut by the ejector pin hole feature. All other selection options become grayed out. When this option is used, the automatic intersection excludes the reference models and any molding. – Select a component to intersect — Enables you to manually specify which components are cut by the ejector pin hole feature. – AutoAdd — Similar to the Auto Update Intrscts check box, when this option is selected, the system automatically determines which mold components are cut by the ejector pin hole feature. – Info — Enables you to display information regarding the ejector pin hole feature in the browser. The mold components that are specified display in the Intersected Comps dialog box. To remove any components displayed, you can select the component and either click Remove, or right-click and select Remove. • Counterbore — Each ejector pin clearance hole contains a counterbore. You must also specify the counterbore diameter and depth.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 23

PROCEDURE - Creating Ejector Pin Clearance Holes Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Ejector-Pin Task 1:

EJECTOR-PIN.ASM

Create a coaxial ejector pin clearance hole.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Transparent. 5. Select the Mold tab. 6. Notice the four ejector pin pads on the reference model. 7. Click the Production Features group drop-down menu and select Ejector Pin Hole

.

8. In the menu manager, click Coaxial > Done. 9. Select datum axis A_6. 10. Select the top surface of the EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and click Okay from the menu manager. 11. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and specify a hole diameter of 0.6. 12. Click OK from the Intersected Comps dialog box. 13. Type 1.2 as the counterbore diameter and press ENTER. 14. Type 1 as the counterbore depth and press ENTER. 15. Click OK from the Ej Pin Hole dialog box.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 11 | Page 24

© 2011 PTC

Task 2:

Create an On Point ejector pin clearance hole.

1. Click the Production Features group drop-down menu and select Ejector Pin Hole

.

2. In the menu manager, click On Point > Done. 3. Select datum point EJ-PIN and click Done. 4. Select the top surface of the EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and click Okay. 5. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and specify a hole diameter of 0.6. 6. Click OK from the Intersected Comps dialog box. 7. Type 1.2 as the counterbore diameter. 8. Type 1 as the counterbore depth. 9. Click OK from the Ej Pin Hole dialog box. Task 3:

Create a Linear ejector pin clearance hole.

1. Click the Production Features group drop-down menu and select Ejector Pin Hole

.

2. In the menu manager, click Linear > Done. 3. Select the top surface of the EJECTOR_CORE.PRT as the placement plane. 4. Select the front left EJECTOR_CORE.PRT surface and type 5.5 as the offset distance.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 25

5. Select the front right EJECTOR_CORE.PRT surface and type 8 as the offset distance. 6. Click Okay from the menu manager. 7. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and specify a hole diameter of 0.6.

8. Click OK from the Intersected Comps dialog box. 9. Type 1.2 as the counterbore diameter. 10. Type 1 as the counterbore depth. 11. Click OK from the Ej Pin Hole dialog box.

Task 4:

Create a Radial ejector pin clearance hole.

1. Click the Production Features group drop-down menu and select Ejector Pin Hole

.

2. In the menu manager, click Radial > Done. 3. Select the top surface of the EJECTOR_CORE.PRT as the placement point. 4. Select datum axis A_1 as the radial dimension origin. 5. Select datum plane MOLD_RIGHT to the right of the datum axis A_1 as the radial dimension origin. 6. Type 225 as the Angle and press ENTER. 7. Click Radius > Done from the menu manager. 8. Type 3.75 as the radius value. 9. Click Okay from the menu manager. 10. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and specify a hole diameter of 0.6. CREO精诚网

中国CREO技术领航者 Module 11 | Page 26

© 2011 PTC

11. Click OK from the Intersected Comps dialog box. 12. Type 1.2 as the counterbore diameter. 13. Type 1 as the counterbore depth. 14. Click OK from the Ej Pin Hole dialog box. 15. Disable Plane Display Axis Display Display

,

, and Point

.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 27

Creating UDFs User-defined features (UDFs) save time by helping establish a library of commonly used geometry. • Define a UDF from a “template” model. – Standalone ♦ Reference Part option – Subordinate • Select features to include. – Must be sequential • Define prompts. – Every reference requires a prompt. • Define any variable items (optional). – Variable elements or dimensions – Family Table

Figure 1 – “Template” Model

Figure 2 – Highlighted Surface While Defining Prompts

Creating UDFs User-defined features (UDFs) are groups of features, references, and dimensions that can be saved for use on future models. UDFs save time by helping you establish a library of commonly used geometry.

Defining a UDF from a “Template” Model To create a UDF, you must first create a "template" part containing the same base geometry that is in the target model (new model). Then model the features that you wish to include in the UDF on this part. An example is shown in Figure 1. When modeling the features, be sure to consider the number of references being created. In most cases, minimizing the number of references makes the most efficient UDFs. CREO精诚网

Define the UDF (*.gph file) in the UDF library, and give it a recognizable name. 中国CREO技术领航者 The UDF library location is most likely a location unique to your company, Module 11 | Page 28

© 2011 PTC

and is defined by your administrator. The UDF library can be accessed from the Group Directory Common Folder, which displays when appropriate. Specify the storage option type. There are two types of storage options: • Subordinate – Creates a reference to the original template model and automatically uses the template model as a reference part to guide the UDF placement in the future. The original model must be present for the subordinate UDF to function. If you make any dimensional changes to the original model, they are automatically reflected in the UDF. • Standalone – Does not reference the template model. It copies all the original model information into the UDF file. If you make any changes to the original model, they are not reflected in the UDF. When you create a standalone UDF, you have the option to create a separate reference part. If created, the reference part has the same name as the UDF, but with a “_GP” suffix.

Selecting Features to Include Next, you must select the features to be placed in the UDF. The features must be sequential in the model tree.

Defining Prompts You must define a prompt for each reference created within the selected features. All references from the features selected for the UDF require prompts. The prompts are displayed for each original feature reference when placing a UDF to help you select a corresponding reference in the target model. Therefore, the prompts you create for each reference should be descriptive. Each reference is highlighted in the graphics window as you define its prompt, as shown in Figure 2. If a reference was used to create more than one feature, you are asked to create either Single or Multiple prompts for that reference. • Single – Specifies a single prompt for the reference used in several features. When the UDF is placed, the prompt appears only once, but the reference you select for this prompt applies to all features in the group that use the same reference. • Multiple – Specifies an individual prompt for each feature that uses this reference. If you select Multiple, each feature using this reference is highlighted, so you can type a different prompt for each feature.

Defining Variable Items You can also define any variable items to be stored in the UDF. This is an optional step in UDF creation. Variable dimensions provide a prompt for a dimension value upon placement. Variable elements enable the feature's dashboard to be accessed during placement, to redefine the feature for the current application. A family table enables you to create different instances of the feature, with each instance containing different combinations of features, dimensions, and parameters.

Modifying a UDF CREO精诚网

When the UDF is complete, a *.gph file is saved to the current directory. You 中国CREO技术领航者 can edit a defined UDF by selecting the Modify option in the UDF menu. © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 29

PROCEDURE - Creating UDFs Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Feature-Tools\Create_udf Task 1:

CREATE_UDF.PRT

Create a UDF from a feature in a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

.

2. Right-click Extrude 2 in the model tree and select Info > Reference Viewer. 3. In the Reference Viewer dialog box, notice that Extrude 2 references datum plane RIGHT and Extrude 1. 4. Click the down arrow next to Extrude 1 and cursor over each of the surface references. 5. Notice that the top, flat surface and the circular surface are the two references on the model. 6. Click Close from the Reference Viewer. 7. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. 8. Click UDF Library Utilities group.

from the

9. Click Create from the menu manager. 10. Type keyway as the name and press ENTER. 11. In the menu manager, click Subordinate > Done > Add > Select. 12. Select Extrude 2 as the feature to add and click Done/Return.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 11 | Page 30

© 2011 PTC

13. Notice the top surface highlighted in red. This is the first required reference. 14. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the surface. 15. Type sketching plane and press ENTER.

16. Notice datum plane highlighted in red. This is the second required reference. 17. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the surface. 18. Type orientation reference plane and press ENTER.

19. Notice the cylindrical surface highlighted in red. This is the third required reference. 20. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the surface. 21. Type cylinder surface and press ENTER. 22. Click Done/Return from the menu manager. 23. In the UDF dialog box, select Var Dims and click Define. 24. Zoom in on Extrude 2 and select the left (width) and right (length) 2 dimensions. 25. Click Done/Return > Done/Return from the menu manager.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 31

26. Notice that the first dimension is highlighted. 27. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the dimension. 28. Type key width and press ENTER.

29. Notice that the second dimension is highlighted. 30. Notice the prompt for you to type the prompt for the dimension. 31. Type key length and press ENTER. 32. Click OK in the UDF dialog box to complete the UDF creation. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 11 | Page 32

© 2011 PTC

Placing UDFs To save time, place user-defined features (UDFs) from your company's UDF library into your model. • Open existing UDF (*.gph) • Select Placement references – Prompts can aid you • Edit Variable Dimensions and Annotations Elements • Options – Scaling – Dimension display – Redefine features on-the-fly • Adjustments – Flip orientation

Figure 2 – Selecting References for UDF Placement

Figure 1 – Viewing References on the Original UDF

Figure 3 – The Placed UDF

Placing UDFs If you recreate the same geometry regularly when creating your design models, it can be more efficient to have the system create that geometry for you using UDFs. Creating geometry by placing a pre-existing UDF can be much faster than creating it new each time.

Opening an Existing UDF (*.gph) When placing a UDF, first you must open the target model. You can insert a from the Get Data group in the UDF by clicking User-Defined Feature ribbon, and selecting the corresponding *.gph file. The original template model is required when placing a subordinate UDF. Creo Parametric provides the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box to enable you to easily place UDFs in multiple models. When you place a UDF, the system copies the features into the target model. CREO精诚网 The copied features become a group. The resulting group of features created 中国CREO技术领航者 from a UDF can be dependent or independent of the UDF.

© 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 33

Selecting Placement References for the Prompts Next, you must select references in the target model for each prompt that was defined during the creation of the UDF. When selecting the references, you can view the reference part in a subwindow to help you select the correct references. As you select references, the UDF preview placement dynamically updates in the graphics window.

Editing Variable Dimensions and Annotation Elements You can edit any of the items defined as Variable Items during UDF creation. These include Dimensions, Parameters, and any Annotation Element Items.

Specifying Options Next, you can specify options, such as scaling dimensions upon placement. You can keep the same dimension values or feature sizes, or specify a scaling factor for the features to be placed. This enables you to scale the size of the UDF for different size models, or between models of different units. Plus, you can specify whether you want to lock, unlock, or hide dimensions of the elements that are not specified as variables in the UDF. You also have the ability to redefine any features contained in the UDF on-the-fly. This enables you to customize a UDF upon placement. After selecting features to redefine, you must step the regeneration of the UDF back past the selected features, and then step forward to regenerate them. After the selected UDF feature is regenerated, its dashboard appears, enabling you to redefine it.

Adjusting Placement Orientation and Finishing Placement Certain portions of UDFs, depending on what they are, can be oriented in one of two ways. These items are displayed as Orientation Items in the Adjustments tab. You can select each available Orientation Item and flip its orientation, watching the preview dynamically update. If the placement is successful, a local group is created in the model tree. Items hidden in the UDF remain in their hidden status when placed into the model. You can duplicate UDFs easily using the Copy and Paste tools.

Updating a Modified UDF If you make the placed group of features independent of the UDF, then it results in all the UDF information being copied to the target model as a group without any associative ties to the UDF. If the UDF is modified, the copied group is not updated. However, if you establish a dependency to the original UDF, then changes to the fixed dimensions of the UDF cause a change to the group. You must manually update the group to the UDF change by clicking UDF Operations > Update All from the Operations group drop-down menu and then regenerating the model.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 11 | Page 34

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Placing UDFs Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Tools\Place_UDF Task 1:

PLACE_UDF.PRT

Place a UDF for a keyway in a model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

.

from the Get Data group. 2. Click User-Defined Feature • Select KEYWAY.GPH and click Open. • Accept the default selection of Advanced reference configuration and click OK. 3. Notice that a reference model has been created for this UDF, and displays in a subwindow. • Notice that the first required reference is highlighted in the subwindow, and placement preview of the feature is shown in the main graphics window. • Notice that Reference 1 is highlighted in the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box and the description prompt reads sketching plane. • Select a corresponding planar surface, as shown. 4. Select Reference 2 in the dialog box. • Notice that this reference is highlighted in the subwindow. • Notice that the description prompt reads orientation reference plane. • Select a corresponding plane, as shown.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 11 | Page 35

5. Select Reference 3 in the dialog box. • Notice that this reference is highlighted in the subwindow. • Also notice that the description prompt reads cylinder surface. • Select a corresponding surface, as shown.

6. In the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box, select the Variables tab. 7. Edit the Value for the d5 dimension from 2.00 to 4.

8. In the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box, select the Adjustments tab. 9. In the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box, click Flip and then click Accept . For a more complex UDF, there may be multiple reference directions that can be flipped. The system lists each reference direction in the dialog box, enabling you to flip/preview each reference. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 11 | Page 36

© 2011 PTC

Module

12

Filling and Opening the Mold Module Overview After extracting mold components, you can create the mold result, also known as the molding. You create the molding by simulating the filling of the mold cavity with molten material through mold features such as sprues, runners, and gates. You can then simulate the mold opening process in order to check the correctness of your design. Draft and interference checks can be performed to verify proper mold opening.

Objectives After completing this module, you will be able to: • Create a molding. • Simulate the mold opening sequence. • Check draft on mold components during the opening of the mold. • Check interference on mold components during the opening of the mold. • View mold information.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 1

Creating a Molding You can create the molding by filling the mold cavity through the sprue, runners, and gates. • Molding parts: – Contain a Molding feature. – Are fully-functional parts. – Maintain a parent/child relationship with mold model components and features. • There can be only one molding part in the model. Figure 1 – Mold Model

Figure 2 – Another Molding Part

Figure 3 – Molding Part

Creating a Molding When a mold is filled, molten plastic is injected into the sprue, and it then travels through the runners and gates to fill the mold cavity. The solidified result is known as the molding. There can be only one molding part in the model at a time. Creo Parametric enables you to simulate the filling of the mold cavity and generate the molding. In addition to the mold cavity, the sprues, runners, and gates are also filled to generate the final molding. The molding part is created by using the following molding formula: • Molding = sum of all current workpiece geometry - assembly level cuts that intersect the workpiece (waterlines, for example) - all extracted parts (sliders and cores, for example) - ejector pin clearance holes The molding part is created in the mold model, and it contains a single Molding feature that contains the solid geometry. The molding feature cannot be redefined, but the part is a fully functional part. You can retrieve it in Part mode and perform various operations on the molding part such as removing excess material using Pro/NC, calculating mass properties, and also generating a mesh for flow analysis. To save the molding part, you must save the mold model before erasing it from memory or exiting your current Creo Parametric session. CREO精诚网 The molding part maintains a parent/child relationship with the mold 中国CREO技术领航者 components and assembly level features. Therefore, the molding Module 12 | Page 2

© 2011 PTC

automatically updates when changes are made to the mold components or assembly level features. For example, if the sprue diameter is increased, the molding part automatically updates to reflect the larger diameter.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating a Molding Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Molding Task 1:

MOLDING.ASM

Create a molding in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the graphics window, select MLD_HUB_MOLD_CAVITY. PRT . 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Transparent. 5. Notice the sprue and runner. 6. In the ribbon, select the Mold tab. 7. Click Create Molding the Components group.

from

8. Type HUB_MOLDING as the Part name and press ENTER. 9. Press ENTER to accept the default Mold Part Common Name [hub_molding.prt]. 10. Notice the new component created in the model tree called HUB_MOLDING.PRT. 11. Right-click HUB_MOLDING.PRT and select Open. 12. Spin the model and inspect the molding part. 13. Notice the single Molding feature in the model tree.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 12 | Page 4

© 2011 PTC

Opening the Mold You can simulate the mold opening process by defining steps and moves in the mold model. • Define steps. • Define moves within steps. • Rules: – Each step can contain several moves. – Components can be in only one move per step. – A move may contain several members.

Figure 1 – Fully Opened Mold

Figure 2 – Closed Mold

Figure 3 – Partially Open Mold

Opening the Mold You can simulate the mold opening process to determine whether your final design matches your original design intent. The mold opening process is a series of steps, containing one or more moves. You can specify moves for any component, or member, of the mold model except the reference model and the workpiece. It is convenient to blank the reference model, workpiece, and all mold volumes, as well as the parting lines and surfaces before opening the mold. In order to simulate the mold opening process, you must define the following: • Define Move — An instruction to move one or more members of the mold CREO精诚网 model. When defining a move, you must specify the following items: 中国CREO技术领航者 – The members to be moved. © 2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 5

– The direction reference of the movement. You can select a linear edge, axis, or plane to indicate the direction. When the direction reference is specified, an arrow indicates the positive direction. – The offset value. The members move the amount specified in the direction of the reference specified. The members move parallel to the edge or axis, or normal to the plane. You can specify a positive offset value or a negative offset value to move the member in the opposite direction. • Define Step — A collection of defined moves for opening the mold. You can also perform the following operations on the mold opening simulation: • Delete — Enables you to delete an existing step. • Delete All — Enables you to delete all existing steps. • Modify — Enables you to modify an existing step by adding or deleting moves from the step. • Modify Dim — Enables you to modify the offset value of a given move. You must regenerate the mold model in order for the new value to take effect. • Reorder — Enables you to switch the order of existing steps. You can specify the step you want reordered, then select the step that you want it to become. • Explode — Enables you to simulate the mold opening by stepping through the sequence, in order, one step at a time. Members included in the moves of the step are translated according to the specified offsets. You can continue to step through all the steps in the sequence. A message in the message window indicates when all components in the mold model have been successfully exploded. You can also animate the entire opening sequence.

Rules for Defining a Move You must remember the following rules when defining moves: • Each step may contain several moves that are performed simultaneously. • A member can be included in only one move per step. • A move may contain several members, but they are all offset in the same direction and by the same value.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 12 | Page 6

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Opening the Mold Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Opening Task 1:

OPEN-MOLD.ASM

Create a mold opening sequence of steps.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Mold Opening the Analysis group.

from

3. Click Define Step > Define Move from the menu manager. 4. Select OPEN-MOLD_SLIDER1. PRT and click OK from the Select dialog box. 5. Select the top, front edge to define the direction. 6. Type -150 and press ENTER. 7. Click Define Move from the menu manager. 8. Query-select OPEN-MOLD_ SLIDER2.PRT and click OK from the Select dialog box. 9. Select the top, front edge to define the direction. 10. Type 150 and press ENTER.

11. Click Done from the menu manager.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 7

12. Click Define Step > Define Move. 13. Select OPEN-MOLD_CAVITY. PRT and click OK from the Select dialog box. 14. Select the right, vertical edge to define the direction. 15. Type 250 and press ENTER. 16. Click Done from the menu manager.

17. Click Define Step > Define Move. 18. Select OPEN-MOLD_MOLDING. PRT and click OK from the Select dialog box. 19. Select the right, vertical edge to define the direction.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 12 | Page 8

© 2011 PTC

20. Type 100 and press ENTER. 21. Click Done from the menu manager.

Task 2:

Simulate the mold opening.

1. Click Explode > Open Next from the menu manager. 2. Click Open Next two more times to step through the mold opening sequence. 3. The OPEN-MOLD_CAVITY.PRT needs to open before the sliders. 4. Click Reorder > Step 1 from the menu manager. 5. Click Step 2 as the new step for Step 1 to become. 6. Click Explode > Open Next. 7. Notice that the cavity now opens first. 8. Click Open Next two more times to step through the mold opening process.

9. Click Explode > Animate All from the menu manager to animate the full mold opening sequence. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 9

Draft Checking a Mold Opening Step You can perform draft checking on mold components during the mold opening sequence. • Specify the step to check. • Specify the following: – Pull direction – Draft Angle – One Side/Both Sides – Full Color/Three Color – Part or surfaces to check Figure 1 – Opened Mold

Figure 2 – Draft Check on a Slider

Figure 3 – Draft Check on the Molding

Draft Checking a Mold Opening Step You can perform draft checking on mold components during the mold opening sequence. You can use draft checking to determine whether the mold components have the correct surfaces drafted and suitable draft angles in order to facilitate the mold opening process. In order to perform a draft check, you must first specify on which step of the opening sequence you want to perform the draft check. You must also specify the following items to perform a draft check during the mold opening sequence: • Pull Dir – Specifies the pull direction to be used for the draft check. You can specify the pull direction using either of the following methods: – Specify – Enables you to select a pull direction. You can filter the pull direction reference by plane, coordinate system, curve, edge, or axis and specify the proper reference. You can also flip the pull direction to the opposite side of the reference. – Move Num – Enables you to specify a pull direction reference by specifying a move number in the step. • DraftCREO精诚网 Angle – Enables you to specify the desired draft angle to check. • 中国CREO技术领航者 One Side/Both Sides – Enables you to specify whether the draft check is performed on one or both sides of the direction reference. Module 12 | Page 10

© 2011 PTC

• Full Color/Three Color – Enables you to specify whether the display is shown using the full color spectrum or with three colors. • Part or surface to check for drafting – Once you have specified the pull direction and draft angle, you must specify a part to check for drafting or a surface to check for drafting.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 11

PROCEDURE - Draft Checking a Mold Opening Step Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Opening_Draft-Check Task 1:

DRAFT-CHECK.ASM

Perform draft checks on mold opening sequence steps.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Mold Opening the Analysis group.

from

3. Click Explode > Open Next from the menu manager. 4. Notice that the DRAFT-CHECK_ CAVITY.PRT opens in the first step, and that it opens upward. 5. Click Open Next from the menu manager. 6. Notice that the sliders open next in the second step, horizontal to the mold model pull direction. 7. Click Open Next. 8. Notice that the DRAFT-CHECK_ MOLDING.PRT is ejected in the third step, and that it opens upward.

9. Click Modify > Step 2 > Draft Check > Both Sides > Three Color > Done from the menu manager. 10. Click Move Num > Move 1 from the menu manager. 11. Type 2 as the draft check angle and press ENTER. 12. Select DRAFT-CHECK_ SLIDER1.PRT and notice the draft. CREO精诚网

中国CREO技术领航者 Module 12 | Page 12

© 2011 PTC

13. Click Continue > Setup Dft Ck from the menu manager. 14. Select the Pull Dir check box and click Both Sides > Three Color > Done > Move Num > Move 2 from the menu manager. 15. Select DRAFT-CHECK_ SLIDER2.PRT and notice the draft. 16. Click Done/Return > Done/Return > Done from the menu manager. 17. Click Modify > Step 3 > Draft Check > One Side > Full Color > Done. 18. Click Move Num > Move 1. 19. Type 2 as the draft check angle and press ENTER. 20. Select DRAFT-CHECK_ MOLDING.PRT and notice the draft. 21. Click Continue and select DRAFT-CHECK_CORE.PRT and notice the draft. 22. Click Done/Return > Done/Return > Done > Done/Return. This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 13

Interference Checking a Mold Opening Step Creo Parametric enables you to check moving parts for interference with the static parts for each move you define. • Define the move to perform the interference check on. • Specify the static part to check for interference with. • Interferences highlighted: – Curves – Points

Figure 1 – Interference Curves

Figure 2 – Interference Point

Interference Checking a Mold Opening Step Creo Parametric enables you to check moving parts for interference with a static part for each move you define. After you have defined a move, you must select a static part to check for interference with the current part that you have defined for the move. Areas that are interfering either have their curves highlighted, as shown in Figure 1 or, if interference curves cannot be found, the resulting interference is highlighted by a red point, as shown in Figure 2. You can delete the move and try another method of opening the mold to prevent the interference of parts. You may have to redefine your mold components.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 12 | Page 14

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Interference Checking a Mold Opening Step Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Opening_Interference Task 1:

INTERFERENCE.ASM

Perform interference checking on mold opening sequence steps.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Mold Opening the Analysis group.

from

3. Click Explode > Open Next from the menu manager. 4. Notice the INTERFERENCE_ CAVITY.PRT opens in the first step, and that it opens upward.

5. Click Open Next from the menu manager. 6. Notice that the sliders open next in the second step, horizontal to the mold model pull direction. 7. Click Open Next. 8. Notice the INTERFERENCE_ MOLDING.PRT is ejected in the third step, and that it opens upward. 9. Click Modify > Step 1 > Interference > Move 1 from the menu manager. 10. Query-select INTERFERENCE_ MOLDING.PRT as the static part. 11. Notice that the status bar states that no interference was detected between the cavity and the molding.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 15

12. Click Static Part from the menu manager and select INTERFERENCE_SLIDER1. PRT. 13. Notice that there is no interference between the slider and the cavity. 14. Click Done/Return > Done from the menu manager. 15. Click Modify > Step 2 > Interference > Move 1 from the menu manager. 16. Select INTERFERENCE_ MOLDING.PRT as the static part. 17. Notice the highlighted interference curves between the molding and the slider. 18. Click Done/Return. 19. Click Interference > Move 2 from the menu manager. 20. Select INTERFERENCE_ MOLDING.PRT as the static part. 21. Notice the highlighted interference curves between the molding and the second slider. 22. Click Done/Return > Done. 23. Click Modify > Step 3 > Interference > Move 1 from the menu manager. 24. Select INTERFERENCE_CORE. PRT as the static part. 25. Notice the highlighted interference point between the molding and INTERFERENCE_CORE.PRT. 26. Click Done/Return > Done > Done/Return.

CREO精诚网 This completes the procedure. 中国CREO技术领航者

Module 12 | Page 16

© 2011 PTC

Viewing Mold Information You can view information about your mold model any time you are in Mold mode. • View the following information: – BOM – Components – Cavity Layouts – Split Volumes – Created Volumes – Parting Surf – Split – Last Volume – Shrinkage Figure 1 – Viewing Created Volumes Information

Figure 2 – Viewing Split Volumes Information

Viewing Mold Information You can view information about your mold model any time you are in Mold mode by clicking Info > Mold. You can view the following types of information about the mold: • BOM – Displays a bill of materials of all components found in the mold model. • Components – Displays information on all the components in the mold model, including reference models, workpiece, extracted components, and the molding. • Cavity Layouts – Displays information on all cavity layouts. You can view CREO精诚网 the coordinate system references used for placement of the cavity, the layout type, the number of cavities in respective directions, the names and 中国CREO技术领航者 locations of each cavity, and the overall workpiece size. © 2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 17

• Split Volumes – Displays all volumes created in the mold model as a result of split operations. You can view the mold volume name, its display status in the mold model, and its feature ID. • Created Volumes – Displays information on all sketched mold volumes in the mold model. You can view the mold volume name, its display status in the mold model, and its feature ID. • Parting Surf – Displays information on all parting surfaces created in the mold model. You can view the parting surface name, its display status in the mold model, and its feature ID. • Split – Displays all the split operations performed in the mold model. You can view the parent and child feature ID's of the split, the parting surface used, and the resulting volumes created. • Last Volume – Displays the last created volume in the mold model. You can view the mold volume name, how it was created, its display status in the mold model, and its feature ID. • Shrinkage – Displays any shrinkage applied to the reference model. If the mold model contains more than one reference model, you must specify for which reference model you want shrinkage information. You can view the coordinate system specified for the shrinkage, the shrinkage formula used, and the shrink factors used. You can specify whether you want the output displayed in an Information window within Creo Parametric, whether you want it written to a file, or both.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 12 | Page 18

© 2011 PTC

PROCEDURE - Viewing Mold Information Close Window Mold\Information Task 1:

Erase Not Displayed MOLD-INFO.ASM

Investigate the information for a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click the Analysis group drop-down menu and select Mold

.

3. In the Mold Inf dialog box, clear all Show Info About check boxes except for Shrinkage. • Clear the File check box, leaving the Screen check box selected. • Click Apply. 4. Click Close from the information window. 5. In the Mold Inf dialog box, clear the Shrinkage check box. • Select the Cavity Layouts check box. • Click Apply. 6. Click Close from the information window.

7. In the Mold Inf dialog box, clear the Cavity Layouts check box. • Select the Created Volumes check box. • Click Apply. 8. Click Close from the information window.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 © 2011 PTC

Module 12 | Page 19

9. In the Mold Inf dialog box, clear the Created Volumes check box. • Select the Parting Surf check box. • Click Apply. 10. Click Close from the information window. 11. In the Mold Inf dialog box, clear the Parting Surf check box. • Select the Split Volumes check box. • Click Apply. 12. Click Close from the information window.

13. In the Mold Inf dialog box, clear the Split Volumes check box. • Select the BOM check box. • Click Apply. 14. Click Close from the information window. 15. Click Close from the Mold Inf dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者 Module 12 | Page 20

© 2011 PTC

Copyright Mold Design using Creo Parametric Copyright © 2011 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved. User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and its subsidiary companies (collectively “PTC”) is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is, and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the piracy of PTC software products, and we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal means available, including public and private surveillance resources. As part of these efforts, PTC uses data monitoring and scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of our software. This data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized distributors. If you are using an illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection and transmission of such data (including to the United States), cease using the illegal version, and contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed copy. For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information: For Windchill products, select About Windchill at the bottom of the product page. For InterComm products, on the Help main page, click the link for Copyright 20xx. For other products, click Help > About on the main menu of the product. Registered Trademarks of PTC Advanced Surface Design, Advent, Arbortext, Behavioral Modeling, CADDS, Calculation Management Suite, CoCreate, Computervision, CounterPart, Create Collaborate Control, Designate, EPD, EPD.Connect, Epic Editor, Expert Machinist, GRANITE, HARNESSDESIGN, Info*Engine, InPart, InterComm, IsoCompose, IsoDraw, IsoView, ITEDO, Mathcad, Mathsoft, MECHANICA, NetRegulus, NetRM, the NetRegulus logo, Optegra, OneSpace, Parametric Technology, Parametric Technology Corporation, PartSpeak, PHOTORENDER, ProductPoint, Pro/DESKTOP, Pro/E, Pro/ENGINEER, Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, Product First, Product Development Means Business, Product Makes the Company, PTC, the PTC logo, PT/Products, Shaping Innovation, Simple Powerful Connected, StudyWorks, The Product Development Company, The Way to Product First, Wildfire, Windchill, Windchill DynamicDesignLink, Windchill MPMLink, Windchill PartsLink, Windchill PDMLink.. Trademarks of PTC 3B2, 3DPAINT, Arbortext Editor, Arbortext Content Manager, Arbortext Contributor, Arbortext Companion for Word®, Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher, Arbortext Publishing Engine, Arbortext Dynamic Link Manager, Arbortext Styler, Arbortext Architect, Arbortext Digital Media Publisher, Arbortext CSDB for S1000D®, Arbortext IETP Viewer for S1000D®, Arbortext Reviewer for S1000D®, Arbortext Authoring Interface for S1000D®, Arbortext Editor for S1000D®, Arbortext Publisher for S1000D®, Arbortext Provisioning Manager, Arbortext Provisioning Reviewer, Arbortext Provisioning Transaction Manager, Arbortext Parts Catalog Manager for S1000D®, Arbortext Learning Content Manager for S1000D®, Arbortext Learning Management System, Arbortext Reviewer for EAGLE, Arbortext LSA Interface, Associative Topology Bus, AutobuildZ, Auto Round, CDRS, CoCreate Modeling, CoCreate Drafting, CoCreate Model Manager, CoCreate Drawing Manager, CV, CVact, CVaec, CVdesign, CV DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker, CREO精诚网 Create Collaborate Control Communicate, ECAD Compare, EDAcompare, EDAconduit, DataDoctor, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, Distributed Services Manager, DIVISION, e/ENGINEER, 中国CREO技术领航者 eNC Explorer, Expert Framework, Expert MoldBase, Expert Toolmaker, FlexPDM, FlexPLM, Harmony, Import Data Doctor, InSight, InterComm Expert, InterComm EDAcompare, InterComm

EDAconduit, collective creativity, ISSM, KDiP, Knowledge Discipline in Practice, Knowledge System Driver, ModelCHECK, MoldShop, NC Builder, PDS Workbench, POLYCAPP, Pro/ANIMATE, Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING, Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COLLABORATE, Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONCEPT, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER, Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE, Pro/FEM POST, Pro/FICIENCY, Pro/FLY THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS, Pro/INTERFACE, Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY, Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/Manikin, Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View, Pro/MOLDESIGN, Pro/NC ADVANCED, Pro/NC CHECK, Pro/NC MILL, Pro/NC POST, Pro/NC SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC TURN, Pro/NC WEDM, Pro/NC Wire EDM, Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR, Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER, Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR, Pro/PLOT, Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN TOOLS, Pro/SHEETMETAL, Pro/SURFACE, Pro/TABLE, Pro/TOOLMAKER, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link, Pro/Web.Publish, Pro/WELDING, ProductView, ProductView ECAD Compare, ProductView Validate, PTC Precision, PTC DesignQuest, PTC Channel Advantage, Realized Value Platform, Routed Systems Designer, Shrinkwrap, Validation Manager, Warp, Windchill ProjectLink, Windchill SupplyLink, Windchill RequirementsLink, and Windchill Supplier Management.. Patents of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary Registration numbers and issue dates follow. Additionally, equivalent patents may be issued or pending outside of the United States. Contact PTC for further information. 5,771,392/23-June-1998; (EP)0240557/02-October-1986; 5,423,023/05-June-1990; 4,956,771/11-September-1990; 5,058,000/15-October-1991; 5,140,321/18-August-1992; 5,297,053/22-March-1994; 5,428,772/ 27-June-1995; 5,469,538/21-Nov-1995; 5,469,538/21-November-1995; 5,506,950/09-April-1996; 4,310,614/30-April-1996; 5,513,316/30-April-1996; 5,526,475/11-June-1996; 5,561,747/01-October1996; 5,526,475/6-November-1996; 5,557,176/09-November-1996; 5,680,523/21-October-1997; 5,689,711/18-November-1997; 5,771,392/23-June-1998; 5,838,331/17-November-1998; 5,844,555/01-Dec-1998; 5,844,555/1-December-1998; 5,850,535/15-December-1998; 4,310,615/ 21-December-1998; 4,310,614/22-April-1999; 6,275,866/14-Aug-2001; 6,275,866/14-August-2001; 6,308,144/23-October-2001; 6,447,223B1/10-Sept-2002; 6,473,673B1/29-October-2002; PCT 03/05061/13-Feb-2003; 6,545,671B1/08-April-2003; GB2354683B/04-June-2003; GB2354683B/04June-2003; 6,580,428B1/17-June-2003; GB2354685B/18-June-2003; GB2354684B/02-July-2003; 6,608,623B1/19-August-2003; 6,608,623B1/19-August-2003; 6,625,607B1/23-September-2003; GB2354924/24-September-2003; GB2384125/15-October-2003; GB2354686/15-October-2003; GB2353376/05-November-2003; GB2354096/12-November-2003; GB2353115/10-December2003; 6,665,569B1/16-December-2003; (KO)415475/6-January-2004; GB2388003B/21-January2004; GB2365567/10-March-2004; EU0812447/26-May-2004; GB2363208/25-August-2004; GB2366639B/13-October-2004; 7,006,956/28-February-2006; 7,013,246B1/14-March-2006; 7,013,468/14-March-2006; (JP)3,962,109/25-May-2007; 7,464,007B2/09-December-2008. Third-Party Trademarks Adobe, Acrobat, Adobe LiveCycle PDF Generator, Distiller, FrameMaker and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. ANSYS is a registered trademark of ANSYS Inc. I Run and ISOGEN are registered trademarks of Alias Ltd. TeX is a trademark of the American Mathematical Society. Apple, Mac, Mac OS, Panther, and Tiger are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. AutoCAD, Autodesk Inventor, and RealDWG are trademarks or registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. BEA WebLogic Server and BEA WebLogic Platform are trademarks of BEA Systems, Inc. CATIA and CADAM are registered trademarks of Dassault Systemes, S.A. The Sigma Check icon, CETOL, CETOL 6 Sigma are trademarks of Sigmetrix, LLC. MEDUSA and STHENO are trademarks of CAD Schroer GmbH. Allegro, Cadence, and Concept are registered trademarks of Cadence Design Systems, Inc. Cognos is a registered trademark of Cognos Corporation. CYA, iArchive, HOTbackup, and Virtual StandBy are trademarks or registered trademarks of CYA Technologies, Inc. DataDirect Connect is a registered trademark of DataDirect Technologies. Documentum is a registered trademark of EMC Corporation. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company. JAWS is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific BLV Group, LLC in the United States and other countries. Geomagic is a registered trademark of Geomagic, Inc. 2D DCM, 3D DCM, CDM and AEM are trademarks of D-Cubed Ltd. HP, Hewlett-Packard, and HP-UX are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. IBM, DB2, DOORS, AIX, and WebSphere are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation. Advanced ClusterProven, ClusterProven, the ClusterProven design, Rational Rose, and Rational ClearCase are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines in the United States and other countries and are used under license. IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not responsible for the operation of this software product. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. OrbixWeb is a registered trademark of IONA Technologies PLC. Feature-Following Anti-Aliasing is a trademark of LightWork Design. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. 3Dconnexion is a registered trademark of Logitech International S.A. MSC.NASTRAN is a registered trademark of MSC Software Corporation. MainWinCREO精诚网 and Mainsoft are trademarks of Mainsoft Corporation. MatrixOne is a trademark of MatrixOne, Inc. Mentor Graphics and Board Station are registered trademarks and 3D Design, 中国CREO技术领航者 AMPLE, and Design Manager are trademarks of Mentor Graphics Corporation. Helix is a trademark of Microcadam, Inc. Microsoft, ActiveX, Excel, JScript, Vista, Windows, the Windows logo, Visual

Basic, the Visual Basic logo, SharePoint, and Active Accessibility are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Moldflow is a registered trademark of Moldflow Corporation. Mozilla and Firefox are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation. FLEXnet, FLEXnet Publisher, InstallShield, and InstallAnywhere are trademarks or registered trademarks of Acresso Software Inc. Netscape, Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator, and the Netscape N and Ship's Wheel logos are registered trademarks or service marks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. OSF/Motif and Motif are trademarks of the Open Software Foundation, Inc. Oracle and interMedia are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation. Palm Computing, Palm OS, Graffiti, HotSync, and Palm Modem are registered trademarks, and Palm III, Palm IIIe, Palm IIIx, Palm V, Palm Vx, Palm VII, Palm, More connected, Simply Palm, the Palm Computing platform logo, all Palm logos, and HotSync logo are trademarks of Palm, Inc. or its subsidiaries. PANTONE is a registered trademark and PANTONE CALIBRATED is a trademark of Pantone, Inc. Proximity and Linguibase are registered trademarks of Proximity Technology, Inc. Elan License Manager and Softlock are trademarks of Rainbow Technologies, Inc. RAND is a trademark of RAND Worldwide. RosettaNet is a trademark and Partner Interface Process and PIP are registered trademarks of RosettaNet, a nonprofit organization. SAP and R/3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. IRIX is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. S1000D (R) is a registered trademark of ASD. SolidWorks and eDrawings are trademarks or registered trademarks of SolidWorks Corporation. SPARC is a registered trademark and SPARCStation is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc. (Products bearing the SPARC trademarks are based on an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc.) All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo, Solaris, UltraSPARC, Java and all Java based marks, and "The Network is the Computer" are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. Symbolics, CLOE Runtime, and Minima are trademarks, and CLOE, Genera, and Zetalisp are registered trademarks of Symbolics, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group. TIBCO is a registered trademark and TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO Enterprise Message Service, TIBCO Rendezvous, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are trademarks or registered trademarks of TIBCO Software Inc. in the United States and other countries. I-DEAS, Metaphase, Parasolid, SHERPA, Solid Edge, TeamCenter, UG NX, and Unigraphics are trademarks or registered trademarks of UGS Corp., a Siemens group company. Galaxy Application Environment is a licensed trademark of Visix Software, Inc. WebEx is a trademark of WebEx Communications, Inc. API Tookit is a trademark of InterCAP Graphics Systems, Inc. BEA and WebLogic are registered trademarks of BEA Systems, Inc. X Window System is a trademark of X Consortium, Inc. VERICUT is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of CGTech. Product may contain RealDWG technology by Autodesk, Inc., Copyright 1998-2006 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved (www.autodesk.com/autodeskrealdwg). File Filters © 1986-2002 Circle Systems, Inc. Certain business intelligence reporting functionality is powered by Cognos. DFORMD.DLL is copyrighted software from Compaq Computer Corporation and may not be distributed. Pro/TOOLMAKER contains licensed third-party technology: 5AXMSURF is copyrighted software of ModuleWorks GmbH. Certain 3D Read CAD data exchange tools are copyrighted software of Datakit SRL. Hyphenologist Copyright 1986-1999, Computer Hyphenation Ltd. All rights reserved. RetrievalWare is copyrighted software of Convera Corporation. DataDirect Connect is copyrighted software of DataDirect Technologies. PStill and PSRaster software is copyright © Dipl.- Ing. Frank Siegert, 1996 to present. FAST InStream is copyright © of Fast Search & Transfer, Inc. Portions of the Mathcad Solver © 1990-2002 by Frontline Systems, Inc. Exceed and Exceed 3D are copyrighted software of Hummingbird Ltd., a division of Open Text Corporation. Rational Rose and Rational ClearCase are copyrighted software of IBM Corp. IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not responsible for the operation of this software product. G POST is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of Austin NC. Xdriver and 3dxsrv are copyrighted software of 3Dconnexion, Inc, a Logitech International S.A. company. Larson CGM Engine 9.4, Copyright © 1992-2006 Larson Software Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. LightWork Libraries are copyrighted by LightWork Design 1990–2001. MainWin Dedicated Libraries are copyrighted software of Mainsoft Corporation. Microsoft Jet, Microsoft XML, Technology "Powered by Groove", Microsoft SQL Server 2005, Visual Basic for Applications, Internet Explorer and Portions compiled from Microsoft Developer Network Redistributable Sample Code, including Microsoft DLL redistributables, are all copyrighted software of Microsoft Corporation. Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR is powered by Moldflow technology. Fatigue Advisor nCode libraries from nCode International. NuTCRACKER Server Operating Environment is copyrighted software of MKS Inc. Oracle 8i run time, Oracle 9i run time, and Oracle 10g run time are Copyright 2002–2004 Oracle Corporation. Oracle programs provided herein are subject to a restricted use license and can only be used in conjunction with the PTC software they are provided with. PDFlib software is copyright © 1997-2005 PDFlib GmbH. All rights reserved. Proximity Linguistic CREO精诚网 Technology provides Spelling Check/Thesaurus portions of certain software products, including: The Proximity/Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag Database. Copyright © 1997 Bertelsmann Lexikon 中国CREO技术领航者 Verlag. Copyright © 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/C.A. Strombertg AB Database. Copyright © 1989 C.A. Strombertg AB. Copyright © 1989, All Rights

Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Editions Fernand Nathan Database. Copyright © 1984 Editions Fernand Nathan. Copyright © 1989, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Espasa-Calpe Database. Copyright © 1990 Espasa-Calpe. Copyright © 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre i Maura Database. Copyright © 1991 Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre i Maura Copyright © 1991, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Database. Copyright © 1994 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Copyright © 1994, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Hachette Database. Copyright © 1992 Hachette. Copyright © 1992, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/IDE a.s. Database. Copyright © 1989, 1990 IDE a.s. Copyright © 1989, 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Merriam-Webster, Inc. Database. Copyright © 1984, 1990 Merriam-Webster, Inc. Copyright © 1984, 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Merriam-Webster, Inc./Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Database. Copyright © 1990 Merriam-Webster Inc. Copyright © 1994 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Copyright © 1994, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd. Database. Copyright © 1990 Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd. Copyright © 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/S. Fischer Verlag Database. Copyright © 1983 S. Fischer Verlag. Copyright © 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Van Dale Lexicografie by Database. Copyright © 1995, 1997 Van Dale Lexicografie by. Copyright © 1996, 1997, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. Database. Copyright © 1984, 1990 William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. Copyright © 1988, 1990, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc.; The Proximity/Zanichelli Database. Copyright © 1989 Zanichelli. Copyright © 1989, All Rights Reserved, Proximity Technology, Inc. Certain license management is based on Elan License Manager © 1989-1999 Rainbow Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. PDEFIT © 1995-2002 Dr. Klaus Schittkowski. MuPAD OEM kernel, version 3.2.1 (Mathsoft Kernel) © 2005 by SciFace Software GmbH & Co. KG. TetMesh GHS3D provided by Simulog Technologies, a business unit of Simulog S.A. HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America, Inc. TECHNOMATIX is copyrighted software and contains proprietary information of Technomatix Technologies Ltd. TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO Enterprise Message Service, TIBCO Rendezvous, and TIBCO BusinessWorks are provided by TIBCO Software Inc. Parasolid is copyrighted software of UGS Corp, a Siemens group company. VisTools library is copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging to VKI Technology "Powered by WebEx" is provided by WebEx Communications, Inc. Certain graphics-handling portions are based on the following technologies: GIF: Copyright 1989, 1990 Kirk L. Johnson. The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this software, including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any special, indirect, or consequential damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence, or other tortious action, arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of this software. JPEG: This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. PNG: Copyright 2004-2006 Glenn Randers-Pehrson. TIFF: Copyright 1988-1997 Sam Leffler, Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. The software is provided AS IS and without warranty of any kind, express, implied, or otherwise, including without limitation, any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. In no event shall Sam Leffler or Silicon Graphics be liable for any special, incidental, indirect, or consequential damages of any kind, or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether or not advised of the possibility of damage, or on any theory of liability, arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of this software. XBM, Sun Raster, and Sun Icon: Copyright, 1987, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine copyright © 1994-2003 Wintertree Software, Inc. Portions of software documentation are used with the permission of the World Wide Web Consortium. Copyright © 1994–2006 World Wide Web Consortium, (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, European Research Consortium for Informatics and Mathematics, Keio University). All Rights Reserved. http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal. Such portions are indicated at their points of use. Copyright and ownership of certain software components is with YARD SOFTWARE SYSTEMS LIMITED, unauthorized use and copying of which is hereby prohibited. YARD SOFTWARE SYSTEMS LIMITED 1987. (Lic. #YSS:SC:9107001) KCL (Kyoto Common Lisp) (C) Taiichi Yuasa and Masami Hagiya, 1984. 2D DCM, 3D DCM, CDM, AEM Copyright D-Cubed Ltd. 2006. BCGControlBar library (C) BCGSoft. Portions of this software copyright Geometric Software Solutions Company Limited, 2004-2005. PDFNet SDK is copyright PDFTron Systems Inc., 2001-2006, and distributed by CoCreate Software GmbH under license. All rights reserved. FE Analysis: Portions of this software copyright The MacNeal-Schwendler Corporation 1996-2006. GOelan V4 is a registered trademark of CN Industries. Portions of this software copyright LightWork Design Limited 1990 - 2005, 2006. Cabling copyright MIP Ltd http://www.mip-group.com. PartLibrary copyright TECHSOFT Datenverarbeitung GmbH (http://www.techsoft.at). CREO精诚网 LAPACK libraries used are freely available at http://www.netlib.org (authors are Anderson, E. 中国CREO技术领航者 and Bai, Z. and Bischof, C. and Blackford, S. and Demmel, J. and Dongarra, J. and Du Croz, J. and Greenbaum, A. and Hammarling, S. and McKenney, A. and Sorensen, D.). Certain software

components licensed in connection with the Apache Software Foundation and/or pursuant to the Apache Software License Agreement (version 2.0 or earlier) or similar style license. All rights are reserved by the Licensor of such works, and use is subject to the terms and limitations (and license agreement) at http://www.apache.org. This software is provided by its Contributors AS IS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, and any expressed or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of title non-infringement, merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the Apache Software Foundation or its Contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Software includes: Apache Server, Axis, Ant, Tomcat, Xalan, Xerces, Batik, Jakarta, Apache POI, Jakarta Regular Expression, Commons-FileUpload, Solr, Tika, and XMLBeans IBM XML Parser for Java Edition, the IBM SaxParser and the IBM Lotus XSL Edition DITA-OT - Apache License Version IzPack: Java-based Software Installers Generator (http://www.izforge.com/izpack/start) Jakarta–ORO NekoHTML and CyberNeko Pull Parser software developed by Andy Clark © Copyright Andy Clark. All rights reserved. Lucene (http://lucene.apache.org) Quartz (scheduler) Copyright 2004-20xx OpenSymphony (http://www.opensymphony.com/quartz/) Jetty Copyright Mortbay.Org (http://www.mortbay.com/mbindex.html) Google Web Toolkit, Google Web Toolkit (GWT) Incubator, and GWTx; Copyright Google U3D Library Copyright 1999 - 2006 Intel Corporation MyFaces (http://myfaces.apache.org/index.html) JDBCAppender (http://www.dankomannhaupt.de/projects/index.html) EHcache Copyright 2003-2007 Luck Consulting Pty Ltd (http://ehcache.sourceforge.net/) cglib Copyright 2002-2004 (http://cglib. sourceforge.net/) LOG4PLSQL Copyright 2002 The LOG4PLSQL project team. All rights reserved (http://log4plsql.sourceforge.net) Log4cxx (http://logging.apache.org/log4cxx/index.html) SPRING See www.springframework.org. HttpComponents project software (http://hc.apache.org/) Commons Codec (http://commons.apache.org/codec/) Apache Log4net (http://logging.apache.org/log4net/) Beans Scripting Framework (BSF) Copyright 2002-2006 The Apache Software Foundation includes software developed at The Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/) WebFX Coolbar 2 (http://webfx.eae.net) WebFX Cross Browser tree Widget 1.17 (http://webfx.eae.net) PCRE 7.2 (http://www.pcre.org/) JDOM Copyright 2000-2004 Jason Hunter & Brett McLaughlin. All rights reserved. This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the JDOM Project (http://www.jdom.org/) The Ajax Control Toolkit (including compiled, object code and source code versions) are licensed only pursuant to the Microsoft Public License (Ms-PL) which can be found at http://www.codeplex.com/AjaxControlToolkit. Microsoft Ajax Library provided pursuant to the Microsoft Software Supplemental License Terms for Microsoft ASP.NET 2.0 AJAX Extensions. The Boost Library - Misc. C++ software from http://www.boost.org; Provided pursuant to: Boost Software License http://www.boost.org/more/license_info.html and http://www.boost.org/LICENSE_1_0.txt. AspectJ (http://www.eclipse.org/aspectj/) and Eclipse SWT (http://www.eclipse.org/swt/); Copyright 20xx The Eclipse Foundation are distributed under the Eclipse Public License (EPL) (http://www.eclipse.org/org/documents/epl-v10.php) and is provided AS IS by authors with no warranty therefrom and any provisions which differ from the EPL are offered by PTC. Upon request, PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. Command Line Argument Parser. Author [email protected] is licensed pursuant to the Shared Source License for Command Line Parser Library and is provided by the author "as is" with no warranties (none whatsoever). This means no express, implied, or statutory warranty, including without limitation, warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, or any warranty of title or noninfringement. No contributor to the Software will be liable for any of those types of damages known as indirect, special, consequential, or incidental related to the Software to the maximum extent the law permits, no matter what legal theory it’s based on. The following software is incorporated pursuant to the "BSD License" (Berkeley Software Distribution) or a similar style license: iCal4j is Copyright © 2005, Ben Fortuna, All rights reserved. Dojo – Copyright 2005, The Dojo Foundation, All rights reserved. Jaxen (shipped as part of dom4j) Copyright 2003-2006 The Werken Company. All Rights Reserved. XMP (eXtensible Metadata Platform) technology from Adobe - Copyright © 1999 - 2007, Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Groovy Copyright 2003 James Strachan and Bob McWhirter. All Rights Reserved. Firebug Copyright 2007, Parakey Inc. JMSN (http://sourceforge.net/projects/jmsn/) Thumb Plug TGA Copyright 1991-2003 Echidna, Inc. All rights reserved. ASM Copyright 2000-2005 INRIA, France Telecom. All rights reserved. PDFBox Copyright 2002-2007, www.pdfbox.org. All rights reserved. BerkeleyDB (as used with OpenDS); Copyright 1990-20xx Oracle Corporation. All rights reserved. MiGLayout - The Java Layout Manager for Swing & SWT; Copyright 2004, Mikael Grev, MiG InfoCom AB. ([email protected]). All rights reserved. PCRE - Perl Compatible Regular CREO精诚网 Expressions – Basic Library Functions written by: Philip Hazel, Email local part: ph10, Email domain: cam.ac.uk, University of Cambridge Computing Service, Cambridge, England. Copyright 中国CREO技术领航者 1997-2008 University of Cambridge. All rights reserved. SIMILE Copyright The SIMILE Project 2006. All rights reserved. Note that JQuery: Copyright 2008 John Resig (www.jquery.com) is

included in the Ajax section of this distribution and is covered under the MIT LICENSE (see below). Launch4j (http://launch4j.sourceforge.net/). The head subproject (the code which is attached to the wrapped jars) is licensed under the MIT license. Launch4j may be used for wrapping closed source, commercial applications. JempBox Java XMP Library: Copyright 2006-2007, www.jempbox.org. All rights reserved. FontBox - Copyright 2003-2005, www.fontbox.org. All rights reserved. ANTLR Copyright 2003-2008, Terence Parr. All rights reserved. Provided pursuant to ANTLR 3 License. (http://www.antlr.org/license.html) NativeCall Java Toolkit (http://sourceforge.net/projects/nativecall/) Redistribution and use of the above in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted provided that the following conditions are met: (i) Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer; (ii) Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution; and (iii) Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of any other contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THE ABOVE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The Java Getopt.jar file, copyright 1987 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc. #ZipLib GNU software is developed for the Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA, copyright © 1989, 1991. PTC hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program #ZipLib written by Mike Krueger. #ZipLib licensed free of charge and there is no warranty for the program, to the extent permitted by applicable law. Except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or other parties provide the program AS IS without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the program is with you. Should the program prove defective, you assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction. The following software is incorporated pursuant to the "MIT License" (or a similar license): SLF4J source code and binaries Copyright 2004-20xx QOS.ch. All rights reserved. Script.aculo.us (built on "prototype.conio.net"). Copyright 2005 Thomas Fuchs (http://script.aculo.us, http://mir.aculo.us). ICU4J software Copyright 1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others. All rights reserved. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. json library: Copyright 2002 JSON.org. XPM Copyright 1989-95 GROUPE BULL. DynamicToolbar FCKEditor plugin, v1.1 (080810); Copyright 2008, Gonzalo Perez de la Ossa (http://dense13.com/). JQuery Copyright 2008 John Resig (www.jquery.com) NATIVECALL (C) 2002–2008 Johann Burkard. All rights reserved. (http://johannburkard.de/software/nativecall/) The above software is used and redistributed under the following permissions: Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. The Java™ Telnet Applet (StatusPeer.java, TelnetIO.java, TelnetWrapper.java, TimedOutException.java), Copyright © 1996, 97 Mattias L. Jugel, Marcus Meißner, is redistributed under the GNU General Public License. This license is from the original copyright holder and the Applet is provided WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. You may obtain a copy of the source code for the Applet at http://www.mud.de/se/jta (for a charge of no more than the cost of physically performing the source distribution), by sending e mail to [email protected] or [email protected]—you are allowed to choose either distribution method. Said source code is likewise provided under the GNU General Public License. The following software, which may be called by certain PTC software products, is licensed under the GNU General Public CREO精诚网 License (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.txt) and if used by the customer is provided AS IS by the authors with no warranty therefrom without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or 中国CREO技术领航者 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE (see the GNU GPL for more details). Upon request

PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution: The PJA (Pure Java AWT) Toolkit library (http://www.eteks.com/pja/en). The following unmodified libraries are likewise distributed under the GNU-GPL: libstdc and #ziplib (each are provided pursuant to an exception that permits use of the library in proprietary applications with no restrictions provided that the library is not modified). The following products are licensed with the Classpath exception (Linking this library statically or dynamically with other modules is making a combined work based on this library. Thus, the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License cover the whole combination. As a special exception, the copyright holders of this library give you permission to link this library with independent modules to produce an executable, regardless of the license terms of these independent modules, and to copy and distribute the resulting executable under terms of your choice, provided that you also meet, for each linked independent module, the terms and conditions of the license of that module. An independent module is a module which is not derived from or based on this library.): javax.media.j3d package; Copyright 1996-2008 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, CA 95054, USA. All rights reserved. The source code is licensed under the GNU Public License, version 2. This project contains the following third-party source code that is provided under separate licensing terms (These terms are found in the THIRDPARTY-LICENSE-*.txt files in the top-level directory of this project. See the README-FIRST.txt for more information.). 3D Graphics API for the Java Platform 1.6.0 Pre-Release licensed under the GNU Public License, version 2, with the Classpath Exception. #ziplib (SharpZipLib, formerly NZipLib), a Zip, GZip, Tar and BZip2 library, Copyright 2000-20xx IC#Code. All rights reserved. #ZipLib was originally developed by Mike Krueger ([email protected]) with the following attributions: (i) Zip/Gzip implementation (a Java version of the zlib) originally created by the Free Software Foundation (FSF); (ii) zlib authors Jean-loup Gailly ([email protected]), Mark Adler ([email protected]) and its other contributors; (iii) Julian R Seward for the bzip2 implementation; (iv) the Java port done by Keiron Liddle, Aftex Software ([email protected]); (v) tar implementation by Timothy Gerard Endres ([email protected]); and (vi) Christoph Wille for beta testing, suggestions, and the setup of the Web site. The following is distributed under GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL) which is at http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/lesser.html and is provided AS IS by authors with no warranty therefrom without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE (see the GNU LGPL for more details). Upon request, PTC will provide the source code for such software for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution: eXist, an Open Source Native XML Database. You may obtain a copy of the source code at http://exist.sourceforge.net/index.html. The source code is likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. GTK+ - The GIMP Toolkit. You may obtain a copy of the source code at http://www.gtk.org/, which is likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. Java Port copyright 1998 by Aaron M. Renn ([email protected]). You may obtain a copy of the source code at http://www.urbanophile.com/arenn/hacking/download.html. The source code is likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. JFreeChart is licensed under the GNU LGPL and can be found at http://www.jfree.org. OmniORB Libraries (OmniOrb is distributed under the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License). The generic AIM library provided pursuant to the JAIMBot project (http://jaimbot.sourceforge.net/). JAIMBot is a modular architecture for providing services through an AIM client. It contains a generic AIM library and a Bot that uses this library to provide such services as Offline Messaging and Weather. PTC does not use the Bot. JExcelApi (http://jexcelapi.sourceforge.net/). 7-Zip Copyright 1999-2006 Igor Pavlov (http://www.7-zip.org). libiconv Copyright 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. (http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv/). NHibernate © 200x, Red Hat Middleware, LLC. All rights reserved (http://www.hibernate. org/343.html). MPXJ © 2000-2008, Packwood Software (http://mpxj.sourceforge.net/). Java Server Faces V3.0.1 (http://java.sun.com/javaee/javaserverfaces/). DevlL Image Lib 0.1.6.7 (http://openil.sourceforge.net/). Zip Master Component Lib 1.79 (http://www.delphizip.org). Exadel RichFaces 3.0.1 (http://www.exadel.com). Jfree / Jfree Chart 1.0.0 (http://www.jfree.org/). Memory DLLLoading code 0.0.1 (http://www.dsplayer.de/open source probjects/BTMemoryModule.zip). May include Jena Software © Copyright 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, LP. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Jena includes: Jakarta–ORO software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (described above). ICU4J software Copyright © 1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others All CREO精诚网 rights reserved. Software is used under the MIT license described above. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote 中国CREO技术领航者 the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. CUP Parser Generator Copyright ©1996-1999 by Scott Hudson, Frank Flannery, C. Scott

Ananian–used by permission. The authors and their employers disclaim all warranties with regard to this software, including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no event shall the authors or their employers be liable for any special, indirect or consequential damages, or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of this software. ImageMagick software is Copyright © 1999-2005 ImageMagick Studio LLC, a nonprofit organization dedicated to making software imaging solutions freely available. ImageMagick is freely available without charge and provided pursuant to the following license agreement: http://www.imagemagick.org/script/license.php. Info-Zip and UnZip (© 1990 2001 Info ZIP, All Rights Reserved) is provided AS IS and WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. For the complete Info ZIP license see http://www.info-zip.org/doc/LICENSE. "Info-ZIP" is defined as the following set of individuals: Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich Wales, and Mike White. ICU Libraries (International Components for Unicode) Copyright 1995-2001 International Business Machines Corporation and others, All rights reserved. Libraries are provided pursuant to the ICU Project (notice is set forth above) at http://www-306.ibm.com/software/globalization/icu/index.jsp. The Independent JPEG Group's JPEG software. This software is Copyright © 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. iText Library - Copyright © 1999-2006 by Bruno Lowagie and Paulo Soares. All Rights Reserved – source code and further information available at http://www.lowagie.com/iText. jpeg-6b.zip - JPEG image compression library, version 6.2. Used to create images for HTML output; Provided pursuant to: http://www.faqs.org/faqs/jpeg-faq/part2. Pop up calendar components Copyright © 1998 Netscape Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. METIS, developed by George Karypis and Vipin Kumar at the University of Minnesota, can be researched at http://www.cs.umn.edu/~karypis/metis. Mozilla Japanese localization components are subject to the Netscape Public License Version 1.1 (at http://www.mozilla.org/NPL). Software distributed under the Netscape Public License (NPL) is distributed on an AS IS basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied (see the NPL for the rights and limitations that are governing different languages). The Original Code is Mozilla Communicator client code, released March 31, 1998 and the Initial Developer of the Original Code is Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by Netscape are Copyright © 1998 Netscape Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Contributors: Kazu Yamamoto ([email protected]), Ryoichi Furukawa ([email protected]), Tsukasa Maruyama ([email protected]), Teiji Matsuba ([email protected]). The following components are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.0 or 1.1 at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL (the MPL) and said software is distributed on an AS IS basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied and all warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations under PTC’s software license agreements are provided by PTC alone (see the MPL for the specific language governing rights and limitations the source code and modifications thereto are available under the MPL and are available upon request): Gecko and Mozilla components Spidermonkey Charset Detector Saxon-B (http://www.saxonica.com/documentation/conditions/intro.html). Office Partner Components 1.64 (http://sourceforge.net/projects/tpofficepartner/). Rhino JavaScript engine, distributed with a form of the Mozilla Public License (MPL). tiff-v3.4-tar.gz - Libtiff File IO Library version 3.4: (see also http://www.libtiff.org ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff) Used by the image EFI library; Provided pursuant to: http://www.libtiff.org/misc.html. The DITA standards, including DITA DTDs, DITA Schemas, and portions of the DITA specification used in online help; copyright 2005-2009 OASIS Open. All rights reserved. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/): Copyright © 1998 2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]) WHICH IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product also includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]). pcre-4.3-2-src.zip Perl Compatible Regular Expression Library version 4.3. http://www.pcre.org; Provided pursuant to: PCRE License. lpng120.zip - PNG image library version 1.2.0. http://www.ijg.org; Provided CREO精诚网 pursuant to: http://www.libpng.org/pub/png/src/libpng-LICENSE.txt. libpng, Copyright © 2004 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, which is distributed according to the disclaimer and license (as well as the list of 中国CREO技术领航者

Contributing Authors) at http://www.libpng.org/pub/png/src/libpng-LICENSE.txt. METIS is © 1997 Regents of the University of Minnesota. Curl software, Copyright ©1996 - 2005, Daniel Stenberg, All rights reserved. Software is used under the following permissions: Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use, or other dealings. Java Advanced Imaging (JAI) is provided pursuant to the Sun Java Distribution License (JDL) at http://www.jai.dev.java.net. The terms of the JDL shall supersede any other licensing terms for PTC software with respect to JAI components. Regular expression support is provided by the PCRE library package, which is open source software, written by Philip Hazel, and copyright by the University of Cambridge, England. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Regular Expressions support was derived from copyrighted software written by Henry Spencer, Copyright © 1986 by University of Toronto. SGML parser: Copyright © 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998 James Clark, 1999 Matthias Clasen. XML parser and XSLT processing was developed using Libxml and Libxslt by Daniel Veillard, Copyright © 2001. libWWW (W3C's implementation of HTTP) can be found at: http://www.w3.org/Library; Copyright © 1994-2000 World Wide Web Consortium, (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique, Keio University). All Rights Reserved. This program is distributed under the W3C's Software Intellectual Property License at: http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal/2002/copyright-software-20021231. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See W3C License http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal for more details. Copyright © 1995 CERN. "This product includes computer software created and made available by CERN. This acknowledgment shall be mentioned in full in any product which includes the CERN computer software included herein or parts thereof." Perl support was developed with the aid of Perl Kit, Version 5.0. Copyright © 1989-2002, Larry Wall. All rights reserved. The cad2eda program utilizes wxWidgets (formerly wxWindows) libraries for its cross-platform UI API, which is licensed under the wxWindows Library License at http://www.wxwindows.org. ZLib - Compression library; Copyright 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; Provided pursuant to ZLib License at http://www.zlib.net/zlib_license.html. ATLPort copyright 1999, 2000 Boris Fomitchev is provided by the copyright holder "as is" with absolutely no warranty expressed or implied. Permission to use or copy this software for any purpose is granted without fee, provided the foregoing notices are retained on all copies. Permission to modify the code and to distribute modified code is granted, provided the above notices are retained and a notice that the code was modified is included with the above copyright notice. PTC reserves the right to modify this code and may do so without further notice. OpenCASCADE software is subject to the Open CASCADE Technology Public License Version 6.2 (the "License"). This software may only be used in compliance with the License. A copy of the License may be obtained at http://www.opencascade.org. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Open CASCADE S.A.S., with main offices at 15 bis, rue Ernest Renan 92136, Issy Les Moulineaux, France. The Original Code is copyright © Open CASCADE S.A.S., 2001. All rights reserved. "The Original Code” and all software distributed under the License are distributed by OpenCASCADE on an "AS IS" basis, without warranty of any kind, and the Initial Developer hereby disclaims all such warranties, including without limitation, any warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or noninfringement (please see the License for the specific terms and conditions governing rights and limitations under the License). PTC product warranties are provided solely by PTC. Certain Pro/TOOLMAKER functions/libraries are as follows: CSubclassWnd version 2.0 - Misc. C++ software; Copyright © 2000 NEWare Software. STLPort - C++ templates; ©1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev; Provided pursuant to: STLPort License http://stlport.sourceforge.net/License.shtml. Zip32 - Compression library; Copyright © 1990-2007. Info-ZIP; Provided pursuant to: Info-ZIP License http://www.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html. Inno Setup - Installer package; Copyright 1997-2007 Jordan Russell; Provided pursuant to Inno Setup License http://www.jrsoftware.org/files/is/license.txt. 7-Zip - Compression package; Copyright 1999-2007 Igor Pavlov; Provided pursuant to 7-Zip License http://www.7-zip.org/license.txt. The implementation of the loop macro in CoCreate Modeling is based on code originating from MIT and Symbolics, Inc. Portions of LOOP are Copyright 1986 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and Portions of LOOP are Copyright 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992 by Symbolics, Inc. All CREO精诚网 Rights Reserved. Used under license pursuant to which permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is granted, provided 中国CREO技术领航者 that the copyright holder’s copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The names "M.I.T." and

"Massachusetts Institute of Technology" and "Symbolics" may not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. Notice must be given in supporting documentation that copying distribution is by permission of the copyright holders. The copyright holders make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. ORACLE, ODBC, and DB2/CLI Template Library, Version 4.0.126, Copyright Sergei Kuchin, 1996, 20xx. This library is free software. Permission to use, copy, modify and redistribute it for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the preceding copyright statement appears in all copies. (see http://otl.sourceforge.net/) The following items are used and licensed pursuant to the Common Development and Distribution License (CDDL). See https://mq.dev.java.net/LICENSE.txt. Metro Web Services Stack, Copyright Sun Microsystems. The copyright holders of this library give permission to link this library with independent modules to produce an executable, regardless of the license terms of these independent modules, and to copy and distribute the resulting executable under differing terms, provided that, for each linked independent module, the terms and conditions of the license of that module are met. Source Code for Metro will be provided upon request and is licensed under the terms of the CDDL. Open MQ – In addition, this project uses Mozilla Network Security Services and Network Security Portable Runtime (NSS / NSPR) which are licensed under the Mozilla Public License. OpenDS uses BerkeleyDB which is described above. The following components are licensed pursuant to the Common Public License (CPL). All warranties and awarded damage relief from use of the technology as provided by PTC are provided solely by PTC and same is disclaimed by other contributors. Source code for the program is available upon request under the terms of the CPL: WIX Installer Toolkit, copyright Microsoft Corp. NSIS (Nullsoft Scriptable Install System), Copyright 1995-20xx, all Contributors. Includes zlib/libpng, bzip2, and lzma compression modules with licensing information at http://nsis.sourceforge.net/License. Certain software is Copyright 2000 - 2008 The Legion Of The Bouncy Castle (http://www.bouncycastle.org). Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions. The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT’95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (JUN’95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227 7013 (OCT’88) or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227 19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN’87), as applicable. 05222009 Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA PRINTING HISTORY Document No. T3424-380-01

Date

Description

12/13/2011

Initial Printing of: Mold Design using Creo Parametric

Order Number DT-T3424-380-01 Printed in the U.S.A

CREO精诚网 中国CREO技术领航者

Sponsor Documents

Or use your account on DocShare.tips

Hide

Forgot your password?

Or register your new account on DocShare.tips

Hide

Lost your password? Please enter your email address. You will receive a link to create a new password.

Back to log-in

Close